1 #LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
7 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
9 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
10 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
11 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
12 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
13 % the documentation team
14 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
16 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
17 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
19 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
20 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
22 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
24 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
25 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
27 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
28 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
29 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
30 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
32 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
36 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
37 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
39 % for customized page headers/footers
40 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
42 % change header rule width
43 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
45 % used to have extra space in table cells
46 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
47 {\usepackage{array}}{}
48 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
50 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
51 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
52 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
54 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
56 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
57 \use_default_options false
62 \maintain_unincluded_children false
64 \language_package default
69 \font_typewriter default
71 \font_default_family default
72 \use_non_tex_fonts false
78 \default_output_format default
80 \bibtex_command bibtex
81 \index_command default
85 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
86 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
90 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
91 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
92 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
97 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
98 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
101 \use_package amsmath 1
102 \use_package amssymb 1
103 \use_package cancel 0
105 \use_package mathdots 1
106 \use_package mathtools 0
107 \use_package mhchem 1
108 \use_package stackrel 0
109 \use_package stmaryrd 0
110 \use_package undertilde 0
112 \cite_engine_type default
116 \paperorientation portrait
120 \notefontcolor #0000ff
137 \paragraph_separation indent
138 \paragraph_indentation default
139 \quotes_language english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes false
144 \output_changes false
161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
163 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
164 send them to the LyX Documentation mailing list:
165 \begin_inset CommandInset href
167 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
178 \begin_inset Newline newline
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Note Note
189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
190 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
191 \begin_inset Newline newline
196 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
204 \begin_layout Standard
205 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
206 LatexCommand tableofcontents
213 \begin_layout Chapter
217 \begin_layout Section
221 \begin_layout Standard
222 LyX is a document preparation system.
223 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar \-
224 scripts, publishable books, business
225 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
226 It is unlike most other
227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
234 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
236 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
252 pt type, left justified, 5
253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
261 LyX takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
265 \begin_layout Standard
266 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
271 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
275 \begin_layout Standard
280 manual describes several things in addition to LyX's philosophy: most important
281 ly, the format of all of the manuals.
282 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
283 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
289 manual describes that, too.
292 \begin_layout Section
296 \begin_layout Standard
297 Like most applications, LyX has the familiar menu bar across the top of
299 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
300 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
304 \begin_layout Standard
305 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
306 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
307 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
309 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
310 only a vertical scrollbar.
311 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
312 The first case is large images.
313 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
314 image and use the option
320 LaTeX and LyX options
323 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
325 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
326 this doesn't work for equations yet.
329 \begin_layout Standard
330 For a brief description of all LyX menus and toolbar buttons, have a look
336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
338 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
345 \begin_layout Section
349 \begin_layout Standard
350 The help system consists of the LyX manuals.
351 You can read all of the manuals from inside LyX.
352 Just select the manual you want to read from the
359 \begin_layout Section
361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
363 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
370 \begin_layout Standard
371 Almost all features of LyX can be configured via the menu
373 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
377 \begin_inset Index idx
380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
386 LyX is able to inspect your system to see what programs, LaTeX document
387 classes and LaTeX packages are available.
388 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
390 Although this configuration has already been done when LyX was installed
391 on your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
396 \begin_inset space \space{}
399 new LaTeX classes, and which are not seen by LyX.
400 To force LyX to re-inspect your system, you should use
402 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
406 \begin_inset Index idx
409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
410 Reconfiguration of LyX
415 You should then restart LyX to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
418 \begin_layout Section
420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
422 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
429 \begin_layout Standard
430 You can edit documents in LyX without having LaTeX installed, but you will
431 not be able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it
433 However, some LyX documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
434 PDFs and the like, and every LyX document can always be output as plain
438 \begin_layout Standard
439 Some document classes may depend upon specific LaTeX or DocBook classes
441 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
442 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
445 \begin_layout Standard
446 The LaTeX packages that LyX has found on your system are listed in a file
447 you can view from the menu
449 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
468 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
469 reconfigure LyX (menu
471 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
475 \begin_inset Note Note
478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
479 The two braces in the TeX Code box prevent that the term
480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
487 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
488 More about TeX Code is described in section
493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
495 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
499 , the printout of proper names like LaTeX is explained in section
504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
506 reference "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
516 \begin_inset Index idx
519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
520 Reconfiguration of LyX
525 See section 5.1 of the
529 manual for more information on installing additional LaTeX packages.
532 \begin_layout Chapter
536 \begin_layout Section
537 Basic File Operations
538 \begin_inset Index idx
541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
550 \begin_layout Standard
555 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
556 in addition to some more advanced operations:
559 \begin_layout Itemize
581 \begin_layout Itemize
597 arg "buffer-new-template"
603 \begin_layout Itemize
625 \begin_layout Itemize
635 \begin_layout Itemize
649 \begin_layout Itemize
671 \begin_layout Itemize
683 arg "buffer-write-as"
689 \begin_layout Itemize
703 \begin_layout Itemize
711 arg "dialog-show print"
719 arg "dialog-show print"
725 \begin_layout Itemize
739 \begin_layout Standard
740 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
741 a few minor differences.
744 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
755 command lists the available templates.
756 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
757 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
758 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
760 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
766 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
773 \begin_layout Standard
774 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
806 Unless you tell LyX to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank
807 space is just that — a big, blank space.
815 \begin_layout Standard
836 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
841 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
843 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar \@.
861 will reload the document from disk.
862 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
863 and want to restore it to the last save.
872 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
873 them as your changes.
876 \begin_layout Section
877 Basic Editing Features
878 \begin_inset Index idx
881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
890 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
897 \begin_layout Standard
898 Like most modern word processors, LyX can perform cut and paste operations
899 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
900 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
901 The next four sections cover the basic LyX editing features and how to
903 We will start with cut and paste.
906 \begin_layout Standard
907 As you might expect, the
911 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
912 various other editing features.
913 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
917 \begin_layout Itemize
923 \begin_inset Index idx
926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
955 \begin_layout Itemize
961 \begin_inset Index idx
964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
993 \begin_layout Itemize
999 \begin_inset Index idx
1002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1027 \begin_layout Itemize
1031 \begin_inset space ~
1037 \begin_layout Itemize
1041 \begin_inset space ~
1047 \begin_layout Itemize
1051 \begin_inset space ~
1055 \begin_inset space ~
1061 \begin_inset Index idx
1064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1073 \begin_inset Index idx
1076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1091 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1101 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1107 \begin_layout Standard
1108 The first three are self-explanatory.
1109 You can also copy text between LyX and other programs by
1130 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1131 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1136 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1137 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1138 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1139 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1140 into individual cells.
1144 \begin_inset space ~
1149 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1150 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1154 \begin_layout Standard
1158 \begin_inset space ~
1163 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1165 These include HTML, LaTeX, Linkback
1166 \begin_inset space ~
1173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1179 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1180 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1181 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1187 \begin_inset space \space{}
1190 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1191 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1194 \begin_inset space ~
1197 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1203 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1207 \begin_inset space ~
1216 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1217 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1219 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1223 \begin_inset space ~
1228 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1229 start a new paragraph.
1230 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1235 \begin_inset space ~
1238 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1252 \begin_inset space ~
1255 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1258 paste from the primary selection.
1259 This is normally the currently selected text.
1262 \begin_layout Standard
1265 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1267 \begin_inset space ~
1271 \begin_inset space ~
1279 \begin_inset space ~
1283 \begin_inset space ~
1289 Once you have found a word or expression, LyX selects it.
1294 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1297 \begin_inset space ~
1306 \begin_inset space ~
1311 button to skip the current word.
1315 \begin_inset space ~
1320 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1324 \begin_inset space ~
1329 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1331 If the toggle is set, searching for
1332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1343 will not match the word
1344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1358 Match whole words only
1360 option can be used to force LyX to only find complete words, e.
1361 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1389 LyX offers also an advanced
1392 \begin_inset space ~
1396 \begin_inset space ~
1401 feature that is described in sec.
1402 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1408 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1415 \begin_layout Standard
1416 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1417 \begin_inset space \space{}
1421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1429 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1431 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1436 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1443 \begin_layout Standard
1447 arg "inset-select-all"
1450 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1451 When the cursor is inside an inset
1454 arg "inset-select-all"
1457 selects the content of the inset.
1461 arg "inset-select-all"
1464 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1469 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1472 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1476 \begin_layout Section
1478 \begin_inset Index idx
1481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1488 \begin_inset Index idx
1491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1498 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1500 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1507 \begin_layout Standard
1508 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1509 LyX has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1512 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1515 or the toolbar button
1521 to undo some mistake.
1522 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1524 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1527 or the toolbar button
1534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1541 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1542 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1545 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1548 \begin_layout Standard
1549 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1558 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1559 This is a consequence of the 100
1560 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1563 step undo limit mentioned above.
1566 \begin_layout Standard
1575 work on almost everything in LyX.
1576 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1580 \begin_layout Section
1582 \begin_inset Index idx
1585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1594 \begin_layout Standard
1595 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1598 \begin_layout Enumerate
1603 \begin_layout Itemize
1608 once anywhere in the edit window.
1609 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1613 \begin_layout Enumerate
1618 \begin_layout Itemize
1624 LyX marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1627 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1630 to create a copy of the text in LyX's buffer (and the clipboard).
1633 \begin_layout Itemize
1634 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into LyX using
1636 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1643 \begin_layout Enumerate
1644 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1648 \begin_layout Standard
1649 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1650 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1654 \begin_layout Section
1656 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1658 name "sec:Navigating"
1663 \begin_inset Index idx
1666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1675 \begin_layout Standard
1676 LyX offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1679 \begin_layout Itemize
1684 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1685 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1688 \begin_layout Itemize
1689 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1691 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1693 \begin_inset space ~
1698 or by the toolbar button
1701 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1707 \begin_layout Itemize
1708 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1710 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1713 and use the same menu to return to them.
1714 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1717 \begin_layout Standard
1721 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1726 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1727 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1729 \begin_inset space ~
1734 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1735 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1736 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1737 your last editing position.
1740 \begin_layout Standard
1745 key the cursor will be vertically centered in LyX's main window.
1748 \begin_layout Subsection
1750 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1752 name "sub:The-Outliner"
1759 \begin_layout Standard
1760 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1761 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1762 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1764 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1770 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1774 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1775 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1781 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1786 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1790 \begin_layout Standard
1791 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1792 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1793 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1794 dialog and to modify the citation.
1797 \begin_layout Standard
1798 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1800 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1801 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1809 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1812 \begin_layout Standard
1813 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1814 you further to control the display.
1819 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1820 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1826 option keeps it in the current view state.
1827 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1828 \begin_inset space ~
1831 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1832 \begin_inset space ~
1835 3, the subsections of sections
1836 \begin_inset space ~
1839 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1844 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1845 \begin_inset space ~
1849 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1859 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1862 \begin_layout Standard
1864 \begin_inset space \space{}
1868 \begin_inset Graphics
1869 filename ../images/reload.png
1874 \begin_inset space ~
1877 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1878 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1881 \begin_inset space \space{}
1885 \begin_inset Graphics
1886 filename ../images/down.png
1888 groupId toolbarbuttons
1893 \begin_inset space ~
1897 \begin_inset space \space{}
1901 \begin_inset Graphics
1902 filename ../images/up.png
1904 groupId toolbarbuttons
1909 \begin_inset space ~
1912 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1913 So, for example, you can move section
1914 \begin_inset space ~
1918 \begin_inset space ~
1921 2.4 or after section
1922 \begin_inset space ~
1926 LyX will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1928 \begin_inset Graphics
1929 filename ../images/promote.png
1931 groupId toolbarbuttons
1936 \begin_inset Graphics
1937 filename ../images/demote.png
1939 groupId toolbarbuttons
1943 (or the corresponding key bindings
1951 ) you can change the level of sections.
1952 So you can for example make section
1953 \begin_inset space ~
1957 \begin_inset space ~
1961 \begin_inset space ~
1967 \begin_layout Section
1968 Input/Word Completion
1969 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1971 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1976 \begin_inset Index idx
1979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1986 \begin_inset Index idx
1989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2020 \begin_layout Standard
2021 LyX provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2023 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2024 is used to propose completions.
2027 \begin_layout Standard
2028 Input completion can be activated in the LyX preferences (menu
2030 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2035 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2042 \begin_inset space ~
2046 \begin_inset space ~
2051 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2055 \begin_inset space ~
2060 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2061 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2065 \begin_inset space ~
2071 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2072 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2073 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2074 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2077 \begin_layout Standard
2078 LyX displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there
2079 are completions available.
2084 key to accept a proposed completion.
2085 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2086 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2087 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2094 \begin_layout Standard
2095 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2096 ing options for text.
2097 The special math option
2101 enables characters to be composed.
2102 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2103 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2106 , you can then input the characters
2107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2118 to a formula to get it.
2119 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2120 of the math toolbar.
2121 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2125 that is in LyX's installation folder.
2126 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2135 \begin_layout Section
2137 \begin_inset Index idx
2140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2147 \begin_inset Index idx
2150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2179 \begin_inset Index idx
2182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2213 \begin_layout Standard
2214 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2227 , which can be changed in the LyX preferences under
2229 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2233 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2234 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2240 reference "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
2247 \begin_layout Standard
2251 \begin_inset space ~
2259 \begin_inset space ~
2280 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2284 \begin_layout Labeling
2285 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2289 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2290 LatexCommand nomenclature
2292 description "Tabulator key"
2298 There is no such thing as a tab stop in LyX.
2299 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2300 \begin_inset space ~
2304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2306 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2313 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2317 , especially section
2318 \begin_inset space ~
2322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2324 reference "sub:Lists"
2330 If you are still confused, look in the
2335 \begin_inset Newline newline
2342 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2343 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2347 \begin_layout Labeling
2348 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2352 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2353 LatexCommand nomenclature
2355 description "Escape key"
2362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2369 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2370 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2373 \begin_layout Labeling
2374 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2380 \begin_inset space ~
2384 \begin_inset space ~
2391 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2392 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2396 \begin_layout Standard
2397 There are three modifier keys:
2400 \begin_layout Labeling
2401 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2419 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2420 LatexCommand nomenclature
2422 description "Control key"
2426 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2427 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2431 \begin_layout Itemize
2440 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2443 \begin_layout Itemize
2452 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2455 \begin_layout Itemize
2464 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2468 \begin_layout Labeling
2469 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2487 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2488 LatexCommand nomenclature
2490 description "Shift key"
2494 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2495 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2498 \begin_layout Labeling
2499 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2517 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2518 LatexCommand nomenclature
2520 description "Alt or Meta key"
2524 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2525 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2526 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2532 \begin_inset Newline newline
2535 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2537 menu accelerator keys
2540 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2541 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2545 \begin_layout Standard
2546 For example, the sequence
2547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2553 \begin_inset space ~
2557 \begin_inset space ~
2563 \begin_inset space ~
2571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2590 \begin_inset space ~
2596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2606 \begin_layout Standard
2611 manual lists all other things bound to the
2619 \begin_layout Standard
2620 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2621 LyX, because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar
2622 at the bottom of LyX's main window which describes the name of the action
2623 you have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2624 The LyX menus also list the defined key bindings.
2625 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2626 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2628 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2644 followed by a capital
2651 \begin_layout Chapter
2653 \begin_inset Index idx
2656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2665 \begin_layout Section
2667 \begin_inset Index idx
2670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2679 \begin_layout Subsection
2683 \begin_layout Standard
2684 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2685 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2686 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2687 numbering schemes, and so on.
2688 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2689 and format the title of your document differently.
2692 \begin_layout Standard
2697 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2698 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2699 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2700 If you don't choose a document class, LyX picks one for you by default.
2701 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2704 \begin_layout Subsection
2706 \begin_inset Index idx
2709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2716 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2718 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2725 \begin_layout Standard
2726 You can select a class using the
2728 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2729 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2733 \begin_inset Index idx
2736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2743 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2747 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2751 \begin_layout Standard
2752 There are four standard document classes in LyX.
2756 \begin_layout Description
2757 Article for basic articles
2760 \begin_layout Description
2761 Report for basic reports
2764 \begin_layout Description
2765 Book for writing a book
2768 \begin_layout Description
2769 Letter for US-style letters
2772 \begin_layout Standard
2773 There are also some non-standard classes, which LyX only uses if you have
2774 installed the corresponding LaTeX class files, though most LaTeX distributions
2775 will include many of these.
2776 Here are some of the classes.
2777 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2779 Special Document Classes
2788 \begin_layout Description
2789 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2792 \begin_layout Description
2793 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2797 \begin_layout Description
2798 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2802 \begin_layout Description
2803 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2804 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2805 There are three article layouts available.
2806 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2807 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2808 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2809 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2814 sequential numbering
2815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2818 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2819 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2820 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2821 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2824 \begin_layout Description
2825 Beamer Layout for presentations
2828 \begin_layout Description
2829 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2830 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2834 \begin_layout Description
2835 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2838 \begin_layout Description
2840 \begin_inset space ~
2843 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2846 \begin_layout Description
2847 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2850 \begin_layout Description
2851 Foils Used to make transparencies
2854 \begin_layout Description
2855 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2856 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2860 \begin_layout Description
2861 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2862 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2865 \begin_layout Description
2866 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2869 \begin_layout Description
2870 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2873 \begin_layout Description
2874 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2875 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2876 (Is used by this document.)
2879 \begin_layout Description
2880 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2883 \begin_layout Description
2884 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2887 \begin_layout Description
2892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2899 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2900 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2902 This class is not completely compatible with all LyX features.
2905 \begin_layout Description
2906 Slides Used to make transparencies
2909 \begin_layout Description
2911 \begin_inset space ~
2914 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2915 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2918 \begin_layout Description
2919 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2922 \begin_layout Standard
2923 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2925 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2931 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2932 of the document classes.
2935 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2939 \begin_layout Standard
2940 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2942 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2943 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2945 \begin_inset Index idx
2948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2965 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2966 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2968 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2971 \begin_layout Standard
2973 LyX includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
2974 and some of them, like
2978 , are highly specialized.
2979 LyX tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
2980 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing
2982 No LaTeX distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2983 by some document class.
2984 There are just too many of them.
2985 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2988 \begin_layout Standard
2989 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2997 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
2998 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
2999 document class for a new file.
3000 LyX will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3005 Installing new LaTeX files
3006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3013 manual for information on how to install them.
3014 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3020 \begin_layout Standard
3021 Although LyX provides support for many different sorts of documents, it
3022 does not include support for every document class people might want to
3024 For example, many universities provide LaTeX class files to be used for
3025 dissertations submitted to those universities.
3026 The LyX team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3028 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3032 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3038 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3041 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3043 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3050 \begin_inset Index idx
3053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3062 \begin_layout Standard
3063 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3064 chosen document class.
3065 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3066 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3073 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3077 \begin_inset Index idx
3080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3087 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3091 \begin_layout Standard
3092 Some modules require LaTeX packages or file format converters that are not
3093 always installed by default.
3094 LyX will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3095 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3096 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3097 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since LyX will not be
3098 able to compile the LaTeX file without the missing prerequisites.
3099 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3100 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure LyX by selecting
3103 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3107 \begin_inset Index idx
3110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3111 Reconfiguration of LyX
3117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3120 Installing new LaTeX files
3121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3128 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3131 \begin_layout Standard
3132 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3140 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3141 LyX will advise you about these things.
3149 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3151 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3153 name "sub:Local-Layout"
3158 \begin_inset Index idx
3161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3162 Document ! Local Layout
3170 \begin_layout Standard
3171 Modules are to LyX much as packages are to LaTeX: They are intended to be
3172 used in a variety of different documents.
3173 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3174 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3175 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3176 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3177 You want something that is like a document's own LaTeX preamble.
3178 What you want is LyX's
3179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3195 manual for information on how to use it.
3198 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3202 \begin_layout Standard
3203 Each class has a default set of options.
3204 Here's a quick table describing them:
3207 \begin_layout Standard
3208 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3214 \begin_layout Standard
3216 \begin_inset Tabular
3217 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3218 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
3219 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3220 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3221 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3222 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3223 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3677 \begin_layout Standard
3678 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3684 \begin_layout Standard
3685 You're probably also wondering what
3686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3690 \begin_inset space ~
3694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3698 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3699 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3704 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3709 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3719 headings, there are also
3727 headings, and so on.
3728 We will describe these headings fully in section
3729 \begin_inset space ~
3733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3735 reference "sub:Headings"
3742 \begin_layout Subsection
3744 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3746 name "sub:Document-Layout"
3751 \begin_inset Index idx
3754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3761 \begin_inset Index idx
3764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3773 \begin_layout Standard
3774 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3776 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3783 \begin_inset space ~
3791 \begin_inset space ~
3796 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3798 This is only necessary if LyX doesn't support special options you want
3799 to use for your document.
3800 To learn more about your favorite LaTeX-class and its options, you have
3804 \begin_layout Standard
3808 \begin_inset space ~
3815 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3821 \begin_inset space ~
3826 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3827 You can choose between the following five options:
3830 \begin_layout Labeling
3831 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3836 Use default page style of current class.
3839 \begin_layout Labeling
3840 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3845 No page numbers or headings.
3848 \begin_layout Labeling
3849 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3857 \begin_layout Labeling
3858 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3863 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3864 Whether LyX uses the current chapter or the current section depends on
3865 the maximum sectioning level of the class.
3868 \begin_layout Labeling
3869 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3874 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3875 have the LaTeX-package
3880 \begin_inset Index idx
3883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3884 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
3890 How they are defined is explained in section
3891 \begin_inset space ~
3895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3897 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3904 \begin_layout Standard
3905 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3906 \begin_inset space ~
3910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3912 reference "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
3919 \begin_layout Subsection
3920 Paper Size and Orientation
3921 \begin_inset Index idx
3924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3925 Document ! Paper size
3931 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3933 name "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3940 \begin_layout Standard
3941 You can find the following options in the menu
3944 \begin_inset space ~
3951 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3955 \begin_inset Index idx
3958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3967 \begin_layout Labeling
3968 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3972 \begin_inset space ~
3977 What size paper to print on.
3982 \begin_layout Itemize
3988 \begin_layout Itemize
3994 \begin_layout Itemize
4000 \begin_layout Itemize
4006 \begin_layout Itemize
4009 US letter, US legal, US executive
4012 \begin_layout Itemize
4018 \begin_layout Itemize
4025 \begin_layout Labeling
4026 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4031 To choose whether to output as
4042 \begin_layout Labeling
4043 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4047 \begin_inset space ~
4052 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4053 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4056 \begin_layout Subsection
4058 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4065 \begin_inset Index idx
4068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4075 \begin_inset Index idx
4078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4087 \begin_layout Standard
4088 Paper margins are set in the menu
4090 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4094 \begin_inset Index idx
4097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4106 \begin_layout Standard
4107 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4108 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4109 the paper format and the font size into account.
4112 \begin_layout Subsection
4116 \begin_layout Standard
4117 If you change a document class, LyX has to convert
4122 That includes the paragraph environments.
4123 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4124 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4125 If this is the case, and you change the document class, LyX will mark the
4126 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4135 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4137 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4138 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4139 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4142 \begin_layout Section
4143 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4144 \begin_inset Index idx
4147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4148 Paragraph ! Indentation
4156 \begin_layout Subsection
4158 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4160 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4167 \begin_layout Standard
4168 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4169 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4172 \begin_layout Standard
4173 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4174 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4175 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4176 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4180 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4186 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4187 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4188 language than English.
4189 LaTeX takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language
4193 \begin_layout Standard
4194 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4195 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4197 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4198 LyX takes care of that.
4199 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4201 That way, LyX can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure
4202 figures fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom
4203 of a page, and so on.
4207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4208 LaTeX does this when LyX goes to produce a printable file.
4213 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4214 LyX gives you the ability globally to change
4218 these pre-coded spacings.
4219 We will explain more later.
4222 \begin_layout Subsection
4223 Paragraph Separation
4224 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4226 name "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
4231 \begin_inset Index idx
4234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4235 Paragraph ! Separation
4243 \begin_layout Standard
4251 \begin_inset space ~
4259 \begin_inset space ~
4266 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4270 \begin_inset Index idx
4273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4279 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4282 \begin_layout Subsection
4286 \begin_layout Standard
4287 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4290 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4292 \begin_inset space ~
4297 dialog and toggle the
4300 \begin_inset space ~
4305 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4308 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4312 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4313 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4317 \begin_layout Standard
4318 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4319 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4322 \begin_layout Subsection
4324 \begin_inset Index idx
4327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4328 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4336 \begin_layout Standard
4339 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4343 \begin_inset Index idx
4346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4355 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4359 \begin_inset space ~
4368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4369 You need to have the LaTeX-package
4374 \begin_inset Index idx
4377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4378 LaTeX-packages ! setspace
4383 installed to use this feature.
4388 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4390 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4392 \begin_inset space ~
4397 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4398 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4401 \begin_layout Section
4402 Paragraph Environments
4403 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4405 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4410 \begin_inset Index idx
4413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4414 Paragraph ! Environments
4420 \begin_inset Index idx
4423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4424 Paragraph environments|(
4432 \begin_layout Subsection
4436 \begin_layout Standard
4437 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4440 \begin_layout Standard
4459 \begin_inset Newline newline
4462 command sequence in LaTeX files.
4463 If you don't know LaTeX, or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4464 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4473 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4476 \begin_layout Standard
4477 A paragraph environment is simply a
4478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4485 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4486 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4487 scheme, labels, and so on.
4488 Additionally, you can
4489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4496 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4497 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4498 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4499 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4501 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4503 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4506 \begin_layout Standard
4507 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4508 \begin_inset Graphics
4509 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4515 at the left end of the toolbar.
4516 LyX will change the environment of the
4520 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4521 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4522 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4526 \begin_layout Standard
4535 create a new paragraph using the
4539 paragraph environment.
4541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4548 because if you are in one of these environments:
4551 \begin_layout Itemize
4557 \begin_layout Itemize
4563 \begin_layout Itemize
4569 \begin_layout Itemize
4575 \begin_layout Itemize
4581 \begin_layout Itemize
4587 \begin_layout Itemize
4593 \begin_layout Standard
4594 LyX keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4598 , rather than resetting it to
4603 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4604 \begin_inset space ~
4608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4610 reference "sec:Nesting"
4617 \begin_layout Subsection
4621 \begin_layout Standard
4622 The default paragraph environment is
4627 It creates a plain paragraph.
4628 If LyX resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4629 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4630 this manual) are in the
4637 \begin_layout Standard
4638 You can nest a paragraph using the
4642 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4650 \begin_layout Subsection
4652 \begin_inset Index idx
4655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4664 \begin_layout Standard
4665 A LaTeX title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the
4667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4674 for thanks or contact information.
4675 For certain types of documents, LaTeX places all of this on a separate
4676 page along with today's date.
4677 For other types of documents, the title
4678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4685 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4689 \begin_layout Standard
4690 LyX provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4704 Here's how you use them:
4707 \begin_layout Itemize
4708 Put the title of your document in the
4715 \begin_layout Itemize
4716 Put the author name in the
4723 \begin_layout Itemize
4724 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4725 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4731 Note that using this environment is optional.
4732 If you don't provide any, LaTeX will automatically insert today's date.
4733 If you don't want a date, use the option
4735 Suppress default date on front page
4739 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4740 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4742 \begin_inset space ~
4750 \begin_layout Standard
4751 You can use footnotes to insert
4752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4759 or contact information.
4762 \begin_layout Subsection
4764 \begin_inset Index idx
4767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4774 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4783 \begin_layout Standard
4784 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4785 LyX takes care of the numbering for you.
4788 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4790 \begin_inset Index idx
4793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4794 Section headings ! Numbered
4802 \begin_layout Standard
4803 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4807 \begin_layout Enumerate
4813 \begin_layout Enumerate
4819 \begin_layout Enumerate
4825 \begin_layout Enumerate
4831 \begin_layout Enumerate
4837 \begin_layout Enumerate
4843 \begin_layout Enumerate
4849 \begin_layout Standard
4850 LyX labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4851 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4852 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4855 \begin_layout Standard
4856 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4857 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4858 You group the book into chapters.
4859 LyX does a similar grouping:
4862 \begin_layout Itemize
4867 is divided into either
4878 \begin_layout Itemize
4890 \begin_layout Itemize
4902 \begin_layout Itemize
4914 \begin_layout Itemize
4926 \begin_layout Itemize
4938 \begin_layout Standard
4939 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4947 Not all document types use the
4951 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
4956 is the top-level heading.
4964 \begin_layout Standard
4969 environment to label a new sub-subsection, LyX labels it with its number,
4970 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
4972 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
4974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4984 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4986 \begin_inset Index idx
4989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4990 Section headings ! Unnumbered
4998 \begin_layout Standard
4999 The unnumbered section headings have a
5000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5007 at the end of their name.
5008 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5009 the table of contents, see section
5010 \begin_inset space ~
5014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5023 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5024 Changing the Numbering
5025 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5027 name "sub:Numbering-depth"
5034 \begin_layout Standard
5035 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5036 in the Table of Contents.
5037 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5039 Just as certain classes start with
5053 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5063 This is something you can change.
5066 \begin_layout Standard
5069 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5073 \begin_inset Index idx
5076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5085 \begin_inset space ~
5089 \begin_inset space ~
5094 you will see two counters.
5099 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy LyX numbers a section
5101 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5105 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5106 Short Titles of Headings
5107 \begin_inset Index idx
5110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5111 Section headings ! Short titles
5117 \begin_inset Argument 1
5120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5127 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5129 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5136 \begin_layout Standard
5137 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5138 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5139 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5140 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5143 \begin_layout Standard
5144 LaTeX allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5145 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5146 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5147 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5150 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5152 \begin_inset space ~
5158 This will insert a box labeled
5159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5163 \begin_inset space ~
5167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5170 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5171 This also works for captions inside floats.
5172 There can only be one short title per title.
5175 \begin_layout Standard
5176 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5179 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5183 \begin_layout Standard
5184 The following information applies to all section headings:
5187 \begin_layout Itemize
5188 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5191 \begin_layout Itemize
5192 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5195 \begin_layout Itemize
5196 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5199 \begin_layout Itemize
5200 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5203 \begin_layout Subsection
5207 \begin_layout Standard
5208 LyX has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5222 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5223 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5224 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5225 the text they contain.
5226 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5234 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5237 \begin_layout Standard
5238 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5247 when you start a new paragraph.
5248 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5252 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5253 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5254 have to change back to the
5258 environment yourself.
5261 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5263 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5270 \begin_inset Index idx
5273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5282 \begin_layout Standard
5283 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5284 time for the differences.
5293 are identical except for one difference:
5297 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5306 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5309 \begin_layout Standard
5310 Here's an example of the
5323 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5325 See – no indentation!
5329 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5330 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5331 the other paragraph.
5334 \begin_layout Standard
5335 Here's another example, this time in the
5342 \begin_layout Quotation
5348 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5349 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5350 the first line, then
5354 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5358 you were quoting other text.
5361 \begin_layout Quotation
5362 Here's a new paragraph.
5363 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5364 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5367 \begin_layout Standard
5368 As the examples show,
5372 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5373 They should put quotes in the
5378 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5382 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5385 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5387 \begin_inset Index idx
5390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5397 \begin_inset Index idx
5400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5407 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5416 \begin_layout Standard
5421 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5427 \begin_inset Newline newline
5430 Which I did not rehearse!
5434 It could be much worse.
5435 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5437 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5438 indented a bit more than the first.
5439 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5445 \begin_inset Newline newline
5448 And make things look fine
5449 \begin_inset Newline newline
5455 arg "newline-insert newline"
5461 \begin_layout Standard
5466 does not indent both margins.
5467 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5468 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5471 arg "newline-insert newline"
5477 \begin_layout Subsection
5479 \begin_inset Index idx
5482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5489 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5498 \begin_layout Standard
5499 LyX has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5509 environments, LyX labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5518 environments, LyX lets you provide your own label.
5519 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5520 describing some general features of all four of them.
5523 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5527 \begin_layout Standard
5528 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5530 First, LyX treats each paragraph as a list item.
5539 reset the environment to
5543 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5544 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5545 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5549 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5553 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5560 \begin_layout Standard
5561 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5562 In fact, LyX changes the labels on some list items depending on how it
5564 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5565 you read all of section
5566 \begin_inset space ~
5570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5572 reference "sec:Nesting"
5579 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5581 \begin_inset Index idx
5584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5591 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5600 \begin_layout Standard
5601 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5605 paragraph environment.
5606 It has the following properties:
5609 \begin_layout Itemize
5610 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5614 \begin_layout Itemize
5615 LyX uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5618 \begin_layout Itemize
5619 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5623 \begin_layout Itemize
5624 The items can have any length.
5625 LyX automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5626 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5633 \begin_layout Itemize
5638 environment inside another
5642 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5646 \begin_layout Itemize
5647 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5650 \begin_layout Itemize
5651 LyX always shows the same symbol on screen.
5654 \begin_layout Itemize
5656 \begin_inset space ~
5660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5662 reference "sec:Nesting"
5666 for a full explanation of nesting.
5670 \begin_layout Standard
5671 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5680 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5683 \begin_layout Standard
5684 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5685 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5688 \begin_layout Itemize
5689 The label for the first level
5693 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5697 \begin_layout Itemize
5698 The label for the second level is a dash.
5702 \begin_layout Itemize
5703 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5707 \begin_layout Itemize
5708 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5712 \begin_layout Itemize
5713 Back out to the third level.
5717 \begin_layout Itemize
5718 Back to the second level.
5722 \begin_layout Itemize
5723 Back to the outermost level.
5726 \begin_layout Standard
5727 These are the default labels for an
5732 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5734 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5737 dialog in the submenu
5742 \begin_inset Index idx
5745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5751 These customizations are not displayed in LyX.
5754 \begin_layout Standard
5755 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5756 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5758 \begin_inset space ~
5762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5764 reference "sec:Nesting"
5771 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5773 \begin_inset Index idx
5776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5783 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5785 name "sec:Enumerate"
5792 \begin_layout Standard
5797 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5798 It has these properties:
5801 \begin_layout Enumerate
5802 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5806 \begin_layout Enumerate
5807 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5811 \begin_layout Enumerate
5812 LyX automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5815 \begin_layout Enumerate
5820 environment resets the counter to one.
5823 \begin_layout Enumerate
5836 \begin_layout Enumerate
5837 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5838 Items can have any length.
5841 \begin_layout Enumerate
5842 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5845 \begin_layout Enumerate
5846 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5849 \begin_layout Enumerate
5850 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5854 \begin_layout Standard
5863 shows the different labels for each item in LyX.
5864 Here is how LyX labels the four different levels in an
5871 \begin_layout Enumerate
5872 The first level of an
5876 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5880 \begin_layout Enumerate
5881 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5885 \begin_layout Enumerate
5886 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5890 \begin_layout Enumerate
5891 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5894 \begin_layout Enumerate
5895 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5900 \begin_layout Enumerate
5901 Back to the third level
5905 \begin_layout Enumerate
5906 Back to the second level.
5910 \begin_layout Enumerate
5911 Back to the outermost level.
5914 \begin_layout Standard
5915 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5919 environment, see section
5920 \begin_inset space ~
5924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5926 reference "sub:Customized-Lists"
5931 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in LyX.
5934 \begin_layout Standard
5935 There is more to nesting
5939 environments than we've stated here.
5940 You should read section
5941 \begin_inset space ~
5945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5947 reference "sec:Nesting"
5951 to learn more about nesting.
5954 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5956 \begin_inset Index idx
5959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5968 \begin_layout Standard
5969 Unlike the previous two environments, the
5973 list has no fixed label.
5974 Instead, LyX uses the first
5975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5982 of the first line as the label.
5986 \begin_layout Description
5987 Example: This is an example of the
5994 \begin_layout Standard
5995 LyX typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
5999 \begin_layout Standard
6001 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6008 it is meant that the first usage of the
6012 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6014 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6022 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6027 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6028 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6030 \begin_inset space ~
6036 \begin_inset space ~
6040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6042 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
6046 for more information.) Here is an example:
6049 \begin_layout Description
6051 \begin_inset space ~
6054 Example: This one shows how to use a
6057 \begin_inset space ~
6069 \begin_layout Description
6070 Usage: You should use the
6074 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6075 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6077 It's not a good idea to use a
6081 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6082 You're better off using
6094 paragraphs into them.
6097 \begin_layout Description
6098 Nesting: You can nest
6102 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6106 \begin_layout Standard
6107 Notice that after the first line, LyX indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6108 them from the first line.
6111 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6113 \begin_inset Index idx
6116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6125 \begin_layout Standard
6130 environment is a LyX extension to LaTeX.
6133 \begin_layout Standard
6142 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6144 Here are its properties:
6147 \begin_layout Labeling
6148 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6150 \begin_inset space ~
6153 labels LyX uses the first
6154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6161 of each line as the item label.
6166 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6167 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6168 space as described above.
6171 \begin_layout Labeling
6172 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6173 margins As you can see, LyX uses different margins for the item label and
6174 the body of the item text.
6175 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6176 label width plus a little extra space.
6180 \begin_layout Labeling
6181 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6183 \begin_inset space ~
6186 width LyX uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is
6188 If the label width is larger, the label
6189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6196 into the first line.
6197 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6198 margin of the rest of the item text.
6201 \begin_layout Labeling
6202 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6204 \begin_inset space ~
6207 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6212 environment has the same left margin.
6213 \begin_inset Newline newline
6216 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6219 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6221 \begin_inset space ~
6226 dialog (toolbar button
6229 arg "layout-paragraph"
6236 \begin_inset space ~
6241 determines the default label width.
6242 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6251 multiple times instead.
6252 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in LaTeX.
6254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6261 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6264 \begin_inset space ~
6269 every time you alter a label in a
6274 \begin_inset Newline newline
6277 The predefined default width is the length of
6278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6286 \begin_inset space ~
6292 \begin_layout Standard
6297 list the same way as the
6301 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6307 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6311 \begin_layout Standard
6316 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6317 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6319 \begin_inset space ~
6323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6325 reference "sec:Nesting"
6329 to learn about nesting.
6332 \begin_layout Standard
6333 There is yet another feature of the
6337 list: As you can see in the examples, LyX left-justifies the item labels
6339 You can use additional
6343 to change how LyX justifies the item label.
6348 are documented in section
6349 \begin_inset space ~
6353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6355 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
6360 Here are some examples:
6363 \begin_layout Labeling
6364 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6365 Left The default for
6372 \begin_layout Labeling
6373 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6374 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6381 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6384 \begin_layout Labeling
6385 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6386 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6390 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6397 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6400 \begin_layout Subsection
6402 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6404 name "sub:Customized-Lists"
6409 \begin_inset Index idx
6412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6421 \begin_layout Standard
6422 The features described in this section require that the module
6424 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6426 is loaded in the document settings.
6427 The module uses the LaTeX-package
6432 \begin_inset Index idx
6435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6436 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6444 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6445 Custom Enumerate Lists
6446 \begin_inset Index idx
6449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6450 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6458 \begin_layout Standard
6460 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6463 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6466 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6467 There you add the command
6470 \begin_layout Standard
6478 \begin_layout Standard
6479 in TeX Code (shortcut
6489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6490 For more about TeX Code, look at section
6491 \begin_inset space ~
6495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6497 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6510 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6517 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6518 For capital Roman numerals replace
6530 in the command above.
6531 For Arabic numerals use
6539 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6546 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6561 \begin_layout Standard
6563 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6571 You can only number 26
6572 \begin_inset space ~
6575 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6583 \begin_layout Standard
6584 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6585 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6588 \begin_layout Standard
6589 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6592 \begin_layout Enumerate
6593 \begin_inset Argument 1
6596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6622 \begin_layout Enumerate
6623 \begin_inset Argument 1
6626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6649 \begin_layout Enumerate
6654 \begin_layout Enumerate
6655 \begin_inset Argument 1
6658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6682 \begin_layout Enumerate
6683 \begin_inset Argument 1
6686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6712 \begin_layout Standard
6713 For this list these commands were used:
6716 \begin_layout Standard
6727 \begin_inset Newline newline
6735 \begin_inset Newline newline
6743 \begin_inset Newline newline
6753 \begin_layout Standard
6760 makes the label emphasized and
6769 \begin_layout Standard
6770 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6778 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6779 lists until you change the definition.
6787 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6789 \begin_inset Index idx
6792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6793 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6801 \begin_layout Standard
6802 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6805 \begin_layout Enumerate
6806 \begin_inset Argument 1
6809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6828 \begin_inset Note Note
6831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6832 goes back to default numbering
6840 \begin_layout Enumerate
6844 \begin_layout Standard
6848 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6852 \begin_layout Standard
6853 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6858 Its numbering appears in blue within LyX to indicate that it is a resumed
6859 list and that the numbering will not be correct in LyX, but in the output.
6862 \begin_layout Standard
6863 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6871 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a LaTeX error.
6879 \begin_layout Standard
6880 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6882 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6883 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6884 of a normal enumeration.
6885 There, insert the command
6888 \begin_layout Standard
6894 \begin_layout Standard
6899 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6903 \begin_layout Enumerate
6907 \begin_layout Enumerate
6911 \begin_layout Standard
6912 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6915 \begin_layout Enumerate
6916 \begin_inset Argument 1
6919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6935 This enumeration starts at 4
6938 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6940 \begin_inset Index idx
6943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6952 \begin_layout Standard
6953 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
6955 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
6958 \begin_layout Itemize
6962 \begin_layout Itemize
6963 with standard spacing
6966 \begin_layout Standard
6967 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
6969 Add there the command
6973 to get no additional list space like in this example:
6976 \begin_layout Itemize
6977 \begin_inset Argument 1
6980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6999 \begin_layout Itemize
7003 \begin_layout Itemize
7007 \begin_layout Standard
7008 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the LaTeX-package
7014 \begin_inset Index idx
7017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7018 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7024 For more information see its documentation,
7025 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7034 \begin_layout Standard
7035 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7037 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7038 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7039 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7042 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7045 \begin_layout Enumerate
7046 \begin_inset Argument 1
7049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7057 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7070 \begin_layout Enumerate
7071 with negative indentation
7074 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7075 Further Customization
7076 \begin_inset Index idx
7079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7080 Lists ! Customization
7088 \begin_layout Standard
7089 You can also change the style of description lists.
7093 \begin_layout Standard
7099 \begin_layout Standard
7100 changes the description label font, the command
7103 \begin_layout Standard
7109 \begin_layout Standard
7110 sets the list style.
7113 \begin_layout Standard
7114 An example where the command
7117 \begin_layout Standard
7122 itshape, style=nextline
7125 \begin_layout Standard
7129 \begin_layout Description
7131 \begin_inset space ~
7135 \begin_inset Argument 1
7138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7144 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7146 itshape, style=nextline
7156 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7157 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7161 \begin_layout Description
7163 \begin_inset space ~
7166 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7167 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7168 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7171 \begin_layout Standard
7172 There are many more commands and features provided by the LaTeX-package
7178 \begin_inset Index idx
7181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7182 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7188 For more information see its documentation
7189 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7198 \begin_layout Subsection
7200 \begin_inset Index idx
7203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7212 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7214 \begin_inset space ~
7217 Address: An Overview
7220 \begin_layout Standard
7221 Although LyX has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7229 \begin_inset space ~
7235 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7236 in a specific order, otherwise LaTeX gags on the document.
7237 In contrast, you can use the
7244 \begin_inset space ~
7249 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7250 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7254 \begin_layout Standard
7255 Of course, you're not limited to using
7262 \begin_inset space ~
7271 \begin_inset space ~
7276 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7277 some European academic papers.
7280 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7282 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7284 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7291 \begin_layout Standard
7296 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7297 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7301 \begin_inset space ~
7306 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7307 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7308 Here's an example of each:
7311 \begin_layout Right Address
7313 \begin_inset Newline newline
7317 \begin_inset Newline newline
7321 \begin_inset Newline newline
7324 When is it? What is today?
7327 \begin_layout Standard
7331 \begin_inset space ~
7337 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which LyX sets to
7338 fit the largest block of text on a single line.
7339 Here's an example of the
7346 \begin_layout Address
7348 \begin_inset Newline newline
7351 Where do I send this
7352 \begin_inset Newline newline
7355 Your post office and country
7358 \begin_layout Standard
7359 As you can see, both
7366 \begin_inset space ~
7371 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7376 in either of these environments, LyX resets the nesting depth and sets
7382 This makes sense, since
7390 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7391 Thus, you have to use
7398 arg "newline-insert newline"
7403 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7404 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7406 \begin_inset space ~
7410 \begin_inset space ~
7415 ) to start a new line in an
7422 \begin_inset space ~
7430 \begin_layout Subsection
7434 \begin_layout Standard
7435 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7436 or list of references.
7437 LyX contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7440 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7442 \begin_inset Index idx
7445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7454 \begin_layout Standard
7459 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7460 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7461 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7462 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7476 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7477 The book document classes ignores the
7481 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7485 in a letter document class.
7488 \begin_layout Standard
7493 environment does several things for you.
7494 First, it puts the centered label
7495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7503 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7505 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7506 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7507 the subsequent text.
7508 Well, that's how it will appear on the LyX screen.
7509 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7513 \begin_layout Standard
7514 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7518 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7519 The new paragraph will still be in the
7524 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7525 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7528 \begin_layout Standard
7529 \begin_inset Float figure
7534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7536 \begin_inset Graphics
7537 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7545 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7548 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7550 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7571 \begin_layout Standard
7572 We would love to demonstrate the
7576 environment, but since this document is in the
7577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7584 class, we can't do this.
7585 We inserted it therefore as figure
7586 \begin_inset space ~
7590 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7592 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7597 If you have never heard of an
7598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7605 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7608 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7610 \begin_inset Index idx
7613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7620 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7622 name "sub:Biblio_environment"
7629 \begin_layout Standard
7634 environment is used to list references.
7635 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7636 only use it at the end of the document.
7648 \begin_layout Standard
7649 When you first open a
7653 environment, LyX adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7669 depending on the document class.
7670 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7671 Each paragraph of the
7675 environment is a bibliography entry.
7680 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7681 Each new paragraph is still in the
7688 \begin_layout Standard
7689 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7690 by using a BibTeX database.
7691 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of LyX's bibliogra
7692 phy handling, have a look at section
7693 \begin_inset space ~
7697 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7699 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7706 \begin_layout Subsection
7707 Special Environments
7710 \begin_layout Standard
7711 LyX provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of
7712 a computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7715 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7719 \begin_inset Index idx
7722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7729 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7738 \begin_layout Standard
7743 environment is a LyX extension.
7744 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7749 key as a fixed whitespace.
7753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7765 \begin_inset space ~
7770 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7783 are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
7785 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7788 arg "newline-insert newline"
7805 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7806 So, when you finish using the
7810 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7811 Also, you can nest the
7815 environment inside of others.
7818 \begin_layout Standard
7819 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7822 \begin_layout Itemize
7826 arg "newline-insert newline"
7829 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7830 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7834 \begin_inset space \space{}
7844 arg "newline-insert newline"
7850 \begin_layout Itemize
7854 arg "newline-insert newline"
7864 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7870 \begin_layout Itemize
7871 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7872 You must put at least one
7876 in any line you want blank.
7877 Otherwise, LaTeX generates errors.
7880 \begin_layout Itemize
7881 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7885 since that will insert
7890 You get the typewriter double quotes with
7893 arg "self-insert \""
7899 \begin_layout Standard
7903 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7907 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7911 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7915 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7919 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7920 printf("Hello World!
7925 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7929 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7933 \begin_layout Standard
7934 This is just the standard
7935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7946 \begin_layout Standard
7951 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
7953 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
7954 as if you used a typewriter.
7955 \begin_inset Index idx
7958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7959 Paragraph environments|)
7964 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
7967 Program Code Listings
7972 \begin_inset space ~
7980 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7984 \begin_inset Index idx
7987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7996 \begin_layout Standard
8001 environment is similar to the
8005 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8006 computer console text.
8011 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8024 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8025 you can have empty lines.
8037 \begin_layout Itemize
8038 have a certain language and a text style
8041 \begin_layout Itemize
8042 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8043 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8047 \begin_layout Standard
8048 Because of these properties
8052 works like a typewriter.
8056 \begin_layout Verbatim
8060 \begin_layout Verbatim
8063 The following 2 lines are empty:
8066 \begin_layout Verbatim
8070 \begin_layout Verbatim
8074 \begin_layout Verbatim
8075 Almost everything is allowed in verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8080 \begin_layout Section
8081 Nesting Environments
8082 \begin_inset Index idx
8085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8086 Nesting ! Environments
8092 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8101 \begin_layout Subsection
8105 \begin_layout Standard
8106 LyX treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific
8108 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8110 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8112 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8124 \begin_layout Enumerate
8128 \begin_layout Enumerate
8133 \begin_layout Enumerate
8137 \begin_layout Enumerate
8142 \begin_layout Enumerate
8146 \begin_layout Standard
8147 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8148 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8150 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
8152 \begin_inset space ~
8156 \begin_inset space ~
8164 \begin_inset space ~
8168 \begin_inset space ~
8173 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8175 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8178 arg "depth-increment"
8184 arg "depth-decrement"
8198 arg "depth-increment"
8204 arg "depth-decrement"
8208 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8209 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8213 \begin_layout Standard
8214 Note that LyX only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8215 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8216 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8217 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8220 \begin_layout Standard
8221 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8222 In LyX, you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're
8224 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8227 \begin_layout Subsection
8228 What You Can and Can't Nest
8231 \begin_layout Standard
8232 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8233 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8236 \begin_layout Standard
8237 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8238 than a simple yes or no.
8239 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8242 \begin_layout Itemize
8243 Completely unnestable
8246 \begin_layout Itemize
8247 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8251 \begin_layout Itemize
8252 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8256 \begin_layout Standard
8257 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8258 environments have them:
8261 \begin_layout Description
8262 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8263 Can't nest into them.
8267 \begin_layout Itemize
8273 \begin_layout Itemize
8279 \begin_layout Itemize
8285 \begin_layout Itemize
8291 \begin_layout Itemize
8298 \begin_layout Description
8300 \begin_inset space ~
8303 Nestable You can nest them.
8304 You can nest other things into them.
8308 \begin_layout Itemize
8314 \begin_layout Itemize
8320 \begin_layout Itemize
8326 \begin_layout Itemize
8332 \begin_layout Itemize
8338 \begin_layout Itemize
8344 \begin_layout Itemize
8350 \begin_layout Itemize
8356 \begin_layout Itemize
8363 \begin_layout Description
8364 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8365 You can't nest anything into them.
8369 \begin_layout Itemize
8375 \begin_layout Itemize
8381 \begin_layout Itemize
8387 \begin_layout Itemize
8393 \begin_layout Itemize
8399 \begin_layout Itemize
8405 \begin_layout Itemize
8411 \begin_layout Itemize
8417 \begin_layout Itemize
8423 \begin_layout Itemize
8429 \begin_layout Itemize
8435 \begin_layout Itemize
8441 \begin_layout Itemize
8447 \begin_layout Itemize
8451 \begin_inset space ~
8457 \begin_layout Itemize
8464 \begin_layout Standard
8465 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8473 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8483 \begin_inset space ~
8486 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8487 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8488 nested section headings violate this.
8496 \begin_layout Subsection
8497 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8498 \begin_inset Index idx
8501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8502 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8510 \begin_layout Standard
8511 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8512 affected by nesting anyhow.
8516 \begin_layout Itemize
8520 \begin_layout Itemize
8524 \begin_layout Itemize
8528 \begin_layout Standard
8530 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8538 Figures and tables in
8542 are not affected by this.
8547 Have a look at section
8548 \begin_inset space ~
8552 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8554 reference "sec:Floats"
8558 for more information about
8565 \begin_layout Standard
8566 LyX can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8567 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8571 \begin_layout Standard
8572 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8580 of its own, it behaves just like a
8581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8588 paragraph environment.
8589 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8593 \begin_layout Standard
8594 Here's an example with a table:
8597 \begin_layout Enumerate
8602 \begin_layout Enumerate
8603 This is (a) and it's nested.
8607 \begin_layout Standard
8608 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8614 \begin_layout Standard
8616 \begin_inset Tabular
8617 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8618 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8619 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8620 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8704 \begin_layout Standard
8705 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8712 \begin_layout Enumerate
8714 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8718 \begin_layout Enumerate
8722 \begin_layout Standard
8723 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8726 \begin_layout Enumerate
8731 \begin_layout Enumerate
8732 This is (a) and it's nested.
8736 \begin_layout Standard
8737 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8743 \begin_layout Standard
8745 \begin_inset Tabular
8746 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8747 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8748 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8749 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8833 \begin_layout Standard
8834 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8840 \begin_layout Enumerate
8847 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8850 \begin_layout Enumerate
8854 \begin_layout Standard
8855 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
8859 \begin_layout Standard
8860 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
8862 LyX then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
8865 \begin_layout Enumerate
8870 \begin_layout Enumerate
8871 This is (a) and it's nested.
8874 \begin_layout Standard
8875 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8881 \begin_layout Standard
8883 \begin_inset Tabular
8884 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8885 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8886 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8887 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8972 \begin_layout Standard
8973 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8979 \begin_layout Enumerate
8981 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
8988 \begin_layout Enumerate
8992 \begin_layout Standard
8993 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
8999 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9000 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9004 \begin_layout Subsection
9005 Usage and General Features
9008 \begin_layout Standard
9009 Speaking of levels, LyX can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9018 is the innermost possible depth.
9019 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9022 \begin_layout Enumerate
9023 level #1 – outermost
9027 \begin_layout Enumerate
9032 \begin_layout Enumerate
9037 \begin_layout Enumerate
9042 \begin_layout Itemize
9047 \begin_layout Itemize
9056 \begin_layout Standard
9057 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9058 both of them in the example.
9059 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9069 For example, if we tried to nest another
9074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9081 , we would get errors.
9084 \begin_layout Subsection
9086 \begin_inset Index idx
9089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9098 \begin_layout Standard
9099 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9100 We have several examples of nested environments.
9101 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9105 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9106 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9109 \begin_layout Labeling
9110 \labelwidthstring MMM
9111 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9120 \begin_layout Labeling
9121 \labelwidthstring MMM
9122 #2-a This is level #2.
9123 We created it by using
9126 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9132 arg "depth-increment"
9139 \begin_layout Labeling
9140 \labelwidthstring MMM
9141 #3-a This is level #3.
9142 This time, we just enter
9149 arg "depth-increment"
9153 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9157 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9163 arg "depth-increment"
9170 \begin_layout Standard
9175 environment, nested inside of
9176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9184 So, it's at level #4.
9185 We did this by entering
9188 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9194 arg "depth-increment"
9197 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9202 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9218 \begin_layout Standard
9223 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9226 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9232 \begin_layout Labeling
9233 \labelwidthstring MMM
9234 #4-a This is level #4.
9238 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9241 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9246 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9250 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9255 keep nesting things inside
9256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9267 \begin_layout Labeling
9268 \labelwidthstring MMM
9269 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9274 \begin_layout Labeling
9275 \labelwidthstring MMM
9276 #6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9277 and this is level #6.
9278 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9282 \begin_layout Labeling
9283 \labelwidthstring MMM
9284 #5-b Back to level #5.
9288 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9294 arg "depth-decrement"
9301 \begin_layout Labeling
9302 \labelwidthstring MMM
9306 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9312 arg "depth-decrement"
9315 , we're back at level #4.
9319 \begin_layout Labeling
9320 \labelwidthstring MMM
9321 #3-b Back to level #3.
9322 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9326 \begin_layout Labeling
9327 \labelwidthstring MMM
9328 #2-b Back to level #2.
9333 \begin_layout Labeling
9334 \labelwidthstring MMM
9335 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9336 After this sentence, we will enter
9340 and change the paragraph environment back to
9347 \begin_layout Standard
9348 We could have also used the
9364 environment in place of the
9369 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9372 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9373 Example 2: Inheritance
9376 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9377 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9380 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9389 arg "depth-increment"
9393 \begin_inset Newline newline
9396 which, we will change to the
9404 \begin_layout Enumerate
9409 environment, at level #2.
9412 \begin_layout Enumerate
9413 Notice how the nested
9417 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9421 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9425 \begin_layout Standard
9426 We ended this example by entering
9431 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9435 and reset the nesting depth by using
9438 arg "depth-decrement"
9444 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9445 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9454 \begin_inset Argument 1
9457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9458 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9466 \begin_layout Enumerate
9467 This is level #1, in an
9471 paragraph environment.
9472 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9476 \begin_layout Enumerate
9481 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9487 arg "depth-increment"
9491 Now, what happens if we nest an
9495 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9496 label be? An asterisk?
9500 \begin_layout Itemize
9510 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9511 So, its label is a bullet.
9512 (We got here by using
9515 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9521 arg "depth-increment"
9524 , then changing the environment to
9532 \begin_layout Itemize
9533 Here's level #4, produced using
9536 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9542 arg "depth-increment"
9546 We will do that again\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9551 \begin_layout Enumerate
9552 \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9554 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9559 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9563 , because we are in the
9571 environment (that is, it is an
9586 \begin_layout Enumerate
9591 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9592 type of numbering does LyX use?
9595 \begin_layout Enumerate
9596 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9599 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9602 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9605 \begin_layout Enumerate
9609 arg "depth-decrement"
9612 to decrease the depth after the next
9615 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9622 \begin_layout Enumerate
9624 Look what type of label LyX is using!
9628 \begin_layout Enumerate
9630 Even though we've changed levels, LyX is still using a lowercase Roman
9631 numeral as the label.Why?
9634 \begin_layout Enumerate
9635 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9644 Notice, however, that LyX
9648 reset the counter for the label.
9652 \begin_layout Enumerate
9656 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9662 arg "depth-decrement"
9665 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9666 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9667 into the twofold-nested
9675 \begin_layout Enumerate
9676 The same thing happens if we do another
9679 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9685 arg "depth-decrement"
9688 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9691 \begin_layout Standard
9692 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9697 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9711 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label LyX uses for
9717 The same rule applies for the
9721 environment, as well.
9724 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9725 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9728 \begin_layout Enumerate
9729 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9730 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9731 the same detail with how we did it.
9740 \begin_layout Standard
9748 arg "depth-increment"
9755 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9756 the example in parentheses someplace.
9757 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9758 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9759 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9763 \begin_layout Enumerate
9768 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9773 Now we will add verse.
9774 \begin_inset Newline newline
9777 It will get much worse.
9778 \begin_inset Newline newline
9788 arg "depth-increment"
9799 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9800 \begin_inset Newline newline
9803 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9804 \begin_inset Newline newline
9810 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9823 \begin_layout Standard
9824 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9830 \begin_layout Standard
9832 \begin_inset Tabular
9833 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9834 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
9835 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9836 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
9879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9925 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9935 arg "depth-increment"
9941 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9947 \begin_inset Newline newline
9955 arg "depth-decrement"
9962 \begin_layout Enumerate
9967 : level #1) This is another item.
9968 Note that selecting a
9972 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
9973 3 times to put the table inside the
9981 \begin_layout Quotation
9982 We're now ending the
9986 list and changing to
9991 We're still at level #1.
9992 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
9993 The next set of paragraphs is a
9994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10001 We will nest both the
10008 \begin_inset space ~
10013 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10017 for the letter body.
10021 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10024 to preserve the depth.
10025 Remember that you need to use
10028 arg "newline-insert newline"
10031 to create multiple lines inside the
10038 \begin_inset space ~
10048 \begin_layout Right Address
10050 \begin_inset Newline newline
10053 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10054 \begin_inset Newline newline
10060 \begin_layout Address
10062 \begin_inset space ~
10068 \begin_layout Quotation
10069 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10070 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10073 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10074 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10075 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10076 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10077 as soon as possible.
10078 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10081 \begin_layout Quotation
10082 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10083 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10084 with your order, along with payment.
10087 \begin_layout Quotation
10088 We thank you again for your patience.
10091 \begin_layout Address
10093 \begin_inset Newline newline
10100 \begin_layout Quotation
10101 That ends that example!
10104 \begin_layout Standard
10105 As you can see, nesting environments in LyX gives you a lot of power with
10106 just a few keystrokes.
10107 We could have easily nested an
10128 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10131 \begin_layout Subsection
10133 \begin_inset Index idx
10136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10137 Nesting ! Separation
10143 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10145 name "sub:Separate-Nestings"
10152 \begin_layout Standard
10153 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10155 For example you need two different enumerations:
10158 \begin_layout Enumerate
10163 \begin_layout Enumerate
10168 \begin_layout Enumerate
10172 \begin_layout --Separator--
10176 \begin_layout Itemize
10182 \begin_layout --Separator--
10186 \begin_layout Enumerate
10190 \begin_layout Enumerate
10194 \begin_layout Enumerate
10198 \begin_layout Standard
10199 To tell LyX that there are two lists and not one, set the cursor at the
10200 end of the last item and use the menu
10202 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10203 Start New Parent Environment
10206 This adds an environment separator and a new list behind it.
10207 If you use instead the menu
10209 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10210 Start New Environment
10212 a new list will also be created, but in the same nesting level.
10215 \begin_layout Standard
10216 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10220 arg "paragraph-break"
10227 in the pull-down box for environments in LyX's main toolbar.
10230 \begin_layout Section
10231 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10232 \begin_inset Index idx
10235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10244 \begin_layout Standard
10245 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10246 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, LyX offers
10247 you more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10248 be broken at the end of a line.
10249 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10253 \begin_layout Subsection
10255 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10257 name "sub:Protected-Space"
10262 \begin_inset Index idx
10265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10274 \begin_layout Standard
10275 The protected space: It is used to tell LyX (and LaTeX) not to break the
10276 line at that point.
10277 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10280 \begin_layout Quote
10281 Further documentation is given in section
10282 \begin_inset Newline newline
10286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10288 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10296 \begin_layout Standard
10297 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10312 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10321 A protected space is set with
10323 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10324 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10326 \begin_inset space ~
10334 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10340 \begin_layout Subsection
10342 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10344 name "sub:Horizontal-Space"
10349 \begin_inset Index idx
10352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10353 Spacing ! Horizontal
10361 \begin_layout Standard
10362 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10364 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10365 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10369 The length units are listed in Appendix
10370 \begin_inset space ~
10374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10376 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10383 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10385 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10387 name "sub:Inter-word-Space"
10392 \begin_inset Index idx
10395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10396 Spaces ! Inter-word
10404 \begin_layout Standard
10405 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10406 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10407 at the ends of sentences.
10408 There is no need to do this as LyX automatically takes care about this.
10409 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10410 followed by a period; see section
10411 \begin_inset space ~
10415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10417 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
10422 To insert a normal space, select
10424 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10425 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10427 \begin_inset space ~
10435 arg "space-insert normal"
10441 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10443 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10445 name "sub:Thin-Space"
10450 \begin_inset Index idx
10453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10462 \begin_layout Standard
10464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10471 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10480 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10481 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10482 inside abbreviations:
10485 \begin_layout Quote
10487 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10491 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10494 \begin_layout Standard
10495 or between values and units.
10496 Compare for example this:
10497 \begin_inset Newline newline
10501 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10505 \begin_inset Newline newline
10508 10 kg (normal space
10511 \begin_layout Standard
10512 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10514 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10515 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10517 \begin_inset space ~
10525 arg "space-insert thin"
10531 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10535 \begin_layout Standard
10536 You can also insert the following space types:
10539 \begin_layout Description
10541 \begin_inset space ~
10545 \begin_inset space ~
10548 space A line with a
10549 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10553 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10557 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10560 negative thin space between the arrows.
10563 \begin_layout Description
10565 \begin_inset space ~
10569 \begin_inset space ~
10572 space A line with a
10573 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10577 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10581 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10584 negative medium space between the arrows.
10587 \begin_layout Description
10589 \begin_inset space ~
10593 \begin_inset space ~
10596 space A line with a
10597 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10601 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10605 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10608 negative thick space between the arrows.
10611 \begin_layout Description
10613 \begin_inset space ~
10617 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10621 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10625 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10629 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10633 \begin_inset space ~
10637 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10640 em) space between the arrows.
10643 \begin_layout Description
10645 \begin_inset space ~
10649 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10653 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10657 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10661 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10665 \begin_inset space ~
10669 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10672 em) space between the arrows.
10675 \begin_layout Description
10677 \begin_inset space ~
10681 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10685 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10689 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10693 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10697 \begin_inset space ~
10701 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10704 em) space between the arrows.
10707 \begin_layout Description
10709 \begin_inset space ~
10713 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10717 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10722 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10726 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10729 cm space between the arrows.
10732 \begin_layout Standard
10734 \begin_inset space ~
10738 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10740 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10744 lists the different space sizes.
10747 \begin_layout Standard
10748 \begin_inset Float table
10753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10754 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10757 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10759 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10763 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10773 \begin_inset Tabular
10774 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
10775 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
10776 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10777 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10817 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10841 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10865 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10889 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10893 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
10897 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10921 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10945 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10960 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10973 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10988 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11001 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11016 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11029 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11050 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11052 \begin_inset Index idx
11055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11064 \begin_layout Standard
11065 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special LyX feature for adding extra space
11066 in a uniform fashion.
11067 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11068 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11069 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11070 equally between themselves.
11073 \begin_layout Standard
11074 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11077 \begin_layout Quote
11079 This is on the left side
11080 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11083 This is on the right
11086 \begin_layout Quote
11089 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11093 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11099 \begin_layout Quote
11102 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11106 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11110 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11116 \begin_layout Standard
11117 That was an example in the
11123 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11127 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11131 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11134 is one in a standard paragraph.
11135 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11139 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11142 \begin_layout Standard
11143 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11146 \begin_inset space ~
11151 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11154 \begin_layout Standard
11156 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11160 \begin_inset space ~
11166 \begin_layout Standard
11168 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11172 \begin_inset space ~
11178 \begin_layout Standard
11180 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11184 \begin_inset space ~
11190 \begin_layout Standard
11192 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11196 \begin_inset space ~
11202 \begin_layout Standard
11204 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11208 \begin_inset space ~
11214 \begin_layout Standard
11216 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11220 \begin_inset space ~
11226 \begin_layout Standard
11227 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11235 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11239 in the first line in a paragraph, LyX ignores it.
11240 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11241 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11245 option in the space dialog.
11253 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11255 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11257 name "sub:Phantom-Space"
11262 \begin_inset Index idx
11265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11274 \begin_layout Standard
11275 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11276 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11279 \begin_layout Standard
11280 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11283 What is correct English?:
11284 \begin_inset Newline newline
11288 \begin_inset Newline newline
11292 \begin_inset space ~
11295 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11296 \begin_inset Newline newline
11300 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11311 \begin_inset Newline newline
11315 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11326 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11332 \begin_layout Standard
11334 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11339 \begin_inset space ~
11343 \begin_inset space ~
11347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11351 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11353 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11354 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11358 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11364 \begin_inset space ~
11368 \begin_inset space ~
11372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11375 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11384 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11385 That is why it is named
11386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11394 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11395 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11399 \begin_layout Subsection
11401 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11403 name "sub:Vertical-Space"
11408 \begin_inset Index idx
11411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11420 \begin_layout Standard
11421 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11423 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11424 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11426 \begin_inset space ~
11432 There you find the following sizes:
11435 \begin_layout Standard
11448 are LaTeX sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11453 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11455 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11456 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11458 \begin_inset space ~
11464 \begin_inset Index idx
11467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11468 Document ! Settings
11473 for the paragraph separation.
11474 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11485 \begin_layout Standard
11491 \begin_inset Index idx
11494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11500 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11501 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11506 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11507 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11516 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11525 s are described in section
11526 \begin_inset space ~
11530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11532 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
11541 If there are several
11545 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11546 You can therefore use
11550 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11553 \begin_layout Standard
11558 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11559 \begin_inset space ~
11563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11565 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11572 \begin_layout Standard
11573 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11583 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11584 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11596 \begin_layout Subsection
11597 Paragraph Alignment
11598 \begin_inset Index idx
11601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11602 Paragraph ! Alignment
11610 \begin_layout Standard
11611 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11613 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11616 dialog (toolbar button
11619 arg "layout-paragraph"
11623 There are five possibilities:
11626 \begin_layout Itemize
11634 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11640 \begin_layout Itemize
11648 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11654 \begin_layout Itemize
11662 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11668 \begin_layout Itemize
11676 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11682 \begin_layout Itemize
11690 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11696 \begin_layout Standard
11697 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11698 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11699 the left and right margins.
11700 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11703 \begin_layout Standard
11705 This paragraph is right aligned,
11708 \begin_layout Standard
11710 this one is centered,
11713 \begin_layout Standard
11715 this one is left aligned.
11718 \begin_layout Subsection
11720 \begin_inset Index idx
11723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11724 Page breaks ! Forced
11730 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11732 name "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11739 \begin_layout Standard
11740 If you don't like the way LaTeX does the page breaks in your document, you
11741 can force a page break where you want one.
11742 Normally this will not be necessary, because LaTeX is good at page breaking.
11743 Only if you use a lot of
11747 , LaTeX's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11750 \begin_layout Standard
11751 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11752 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11756 have to change the page breaking.
11759 \begin_layout Standard
11760 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11762 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11764 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11765 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11767 \begin_inset space ~
11773 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11775 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11776 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11778 \begin_inset space ~
11783 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11785 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11786 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11789 \begin_layout Standard
11790 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11791 at the top of a page.
11792 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11793 LyX gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11794 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11795 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11799 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11803 to learn more about
11810 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11812 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11814 name "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11819 \begin_inset Index idx
11822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11823 Page breaks ! Clear
11831 \begin_layout Standard
11832 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
11833 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11834 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11835 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
11836 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11839 \begin_layout Standard
11840 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11842 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11843 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11845 \begin_inset space ~
11851 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
11853 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11854 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11856 \begin_inset space ~
11860 \begin_inset space ~
11865 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
11866 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
11869 \begin_layout Subsection
11871 \begin_inset Index idx
11874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11881 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11883 name "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
11890 \begin_layout Standard
11891 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
11893 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
11895 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11896 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11898 \begin_inset space ~
11902 \begin_inset space ~
11910 arg "newline-insert newline"
11914 Another type that is inserted via the menu
11916 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11917 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11919 \begin_inset space ~
11923 \begin_inset space ~
11931 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
11934 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
11936 This is useful to avoid
11937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11944 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
11947 \begin_layout Standard
11948 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct LaTeX's line breaking, as
11949 LaTeX is very good at line breaking.
11950 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
11951 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
11952 \begin_inset space ~
11956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11958 reference "sec:Quote"
11963 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11965 reference "sec:Verse"
11970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11972 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
11979 \begin_layout Subsection
11981 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11983 name "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
11988 \begin_inset Index idx
11991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12000 \begin_layout Standard
12002 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12013 \begin_layout Standard
12017 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12018 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12020 \begin_inset space ~
12025 you can insert horizontal lines.
12026 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12027 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12028 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12031 \begin_layout Standard
12033 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12044 \begin_layout Section
12045 Characters and Symbols
12048 \begin_layout Standard
12049 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12050 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12051 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12053 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12059 reference "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
12063 for information on how this is done.
12066 \begin_layout Standard
12067 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12072 dialog via the menu
12074 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12075 Special Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12081 \begin_layout Standard
12082 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12090 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12091 when you are using a special screen font in LyX's preferences.
12092 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12100 \begin_layout Section
12101 Fonts and Text Styles
12102 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12104 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12111 \begin_layout Subsection
12113 \begin_inset Index idx
12116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12125 \begin_layout Standard
12126 There are two types of fonts:
12129 \begin_layout Description
12131 \begin_inset space ~
12135 \begin_inset Index idx
12138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12144 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12145 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12149 characters) in the font.
12150 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12151 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12152 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12153 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12154 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12155 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12156 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12157 \begin_inset Newline newline
12160 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12161 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12162 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12163 sizes than at small ones.
12164 \begin_inset Newline newline
12178 \begin_inset space ~
12186 \begin_layout Description
12188 \begin_inset space ~
12192 \begin_inset Index idx
12195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12201 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12202 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12203 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12204 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12205 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12206 image manipulation program.
12207 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12208 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12209 \begin_inset space ~
12212 pixels high up to 34
12213 \begin_inset space ~
12216 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12217 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12218 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12220 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12221 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12222 \begin_inset Newline newline
12225 Bitmap fonts are named
12228 \begin_inset space ~
12233 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12236 \begin_layout Standard
12237 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12238 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12239 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12240 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12241 use scalable fonts.
12244 \begin_layout Standard
12245 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12248 \begin_layout Standard
12249 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12250 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12251 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12252 font to emphasize text, you use an
12253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12261 This concept fits in perfectly with LyX.
12262 In LyX, you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12266 \begin_layout Subsection
12268 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12270 name "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12277 \begin_layout Standard
12278 Traditionally, LaTeX used its own fonts.
12279 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12280 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your LaTeX
12282 The reason is that LaTeX needs some extra information about the fonts,
12283 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12284 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12285 to a word processor.
12286 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12287 are generally of very good quality, and that LaTeX files are very portable
12288 across different machines.
12289 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional LaTeX has increased a
12290 lot in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12292 LyX supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12294 \begin_inset space ~
12298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12300 reference "sub:Document-Font"
12305 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant LaTeX code in the document
12306 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12309 \begin_layout Standard
12310 Recent developments brought some new LaTeX engines that are also able directly
12311 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely XeTeX
12313 Both engines are supported by LyX.
12314 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12315 that is installed on your system.
12316 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12319 \begin_layout Standard
12320 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12328 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12329 es; so you might have to experiment.
12337 \begin_layout Standard
12338 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12346 XeTeX and especially LuaTeX, are still rather new and thus not as mature
12347 as traditional LaTeX or PDFTeX.
12355 \begin_layout Subsection
12356 Document Font and Font size
12357 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12359 name "sub:Document-Font"
12364 \begin_inset Index idx
12367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12374 \begin_inset Index idx
12377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12386 \begin_layout Standard
12387 You can set the document fonts in the
12389 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12393 \begin_inset Index idx
12396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12397 Document ! Settings
12407 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12408 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12411 \begin_inset space ~
12420 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12422 \begin_inset space ~
12425 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12428 \begin_layout Standard
12435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12444 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12445 This requires that you use
12451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12490 as the output format, i.
12491 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12495 \begin_inset space \space{}
12498 you will have to have either XeTeX or LuaTeX installed (see section
12499 \begin_inset space ~
12503 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12505 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12510 You will then not have access to TeX's own fonts.
12511 Note that LyX then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists
12513 \begin_inset space ~
12516 serif, and typewriter), since LyX cannot determine the family.
12517 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12518 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar \slash{}
12520 LyX cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12523 \begin_layout Standard
12524 If you use TeX fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the
12529 and a list of fonts available with your LaTeX distribution.
12534 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12535 In most cases, this will be the standard TeX font, known as
12536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12542 \begin_inset space ~
12548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12561 European Computer Modern
12564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12571 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12574 \begin_layout Standard
12583 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12584 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12589 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12592 \begin_inset space ~
12597 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12603 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12604 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12607 \begin_layout Itemize
12611 \begin_inset space ~
12616 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12629 \begin_inset space ~
12634 was developed for the LaTeX community in order to replace
12638 as the default font.
12639 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12640 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12643 \begin_inset space ~
12656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12657 One difference is improved kerning.
12665 \begin_layout Itemize
12669 \begin_inset space ~
12673 \begin_inset space ~
12678 fonts in (the rare) case that
12681 \begin_inset space ~
12686 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12701 Virtual means that it
12702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12713 -glyphs from other fonts.
12714 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12736 Loading the LaTeX-package
12741 \begin_inset Index idx
12744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12745 LaTeX-packages ! aeguill
12750 with the document preamble line
12751 \begin_inset Newline newline
12758 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12759 \begin_inset Newline newline
12764 will fix the guillemet problem.
12769 and that accented characters are not
12773 glyph, but built of
12777 characters, the accent and the letter.
12778 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12784 If you search for example for the French word
12785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12792 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12801 and not for the glyph
12802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12806 \begin_inset space ~
12810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12816 \begin_layout Itemize
12817 If you do not like the look of
12825 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12826 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12830 \begin_inset space ~
12836 \begin_inset space ~
12846 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12847 \begin_inset space ~
12850 serif and typewriter fonts,
12854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12855 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12856 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12862 \begin_inset space ~
12871 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
12872 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12876 \begin_inset space \space{}
12884 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12888 \begin_inset space \space{}
12894 \begin_inset space ~
12902 \begin_inset space ~
12912 but you can also select your own.
12913 \begin_inset Newline newline
12916 The differences between roman,
12919 \begin_inset space ~
12928 fonts are explained in section
12929 \begin_inset space ~
12933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12935 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12940 \begin_inset Newline newline
12946 \begin_inset space ~
12951 was originally designed for newspapers.
12952 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
12953 into the small newspaper columns.
12957 \begin_inset space ~
12962 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
12965 \begin_layout Standard
12966 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
12979 Some classes provide additional sizes.
12984 depends on the class you are using.
12985 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
12988 \begin_layout Standard
12989 Note that the font size is the
12994 That means that LyX scales all other possible font sizes (such as those
12995 used in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
12996 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
12999 \begin_inset space ~
13005 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13006 \begin_inset space ~
13010 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13012 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13019 \begin_layout Standard
13023 \begin_inset space ~
13028 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13030 \begin_inset space ~
13033 serif or typewriter.
13038 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13048 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13051 \begin_layout Standard
13060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13069 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13075 \begin_inset Index idx
13078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13079 LaTeX-packages ! fontenc
13085 \begin_inset space ~
13089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13091 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
13096 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13097 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13104 \begin_layout Standard
13105 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13107 Use Old Style Figures
13111 Use True Small Caps
13114 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13117 Use Old Style Figures
13119 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13121 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13122 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13126 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13129 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13133 Use True Small Caps
13135 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13136 of scaled capitals.
13137 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13138 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13141 \begin_layout Standard
13146 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13147 a font to display the script characters.
13151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13152 The font will be the argument for the commands of the LaTeX-package
13157 \begin_inset Index idx
13160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13161 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
13166 So this has no effect for the document language
13180 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13184 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13192 When you choose a new font or font size, LyX does
13196 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13197 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13198 LyX's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13200 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13203 dialog, see section
13204 \begin_inset space ~
13208 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13210 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
13222 \begin_layout Subsection
13226 \begin_layout Standard
13227 In LaTeX the font used for characters in equations is different from the
13229 For the case that you use TeX fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13230 choose a math font in the dialog
13232 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13236 \begin_inset Index idx
13239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13240 Document ! Settings
13246 The default setting is that LyX automatically selects a math font.
13247 For most cases this will be LaTeX's default -- the math variant of LaTeX's
13248 default font family
13249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13255 \begin_inset space ~
13261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13265 LyX will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of
13266 the document font is available.
13269 \begin_layout Standard
13270 Note that the math font will not be used for
13274 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13280 or by the insertion of the command
13287 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13288 \begin_inset space ~
13292 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13293 while the math characters do not.
13295 \begin_inset space ~
13298 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13301 \begin_inset space ~
13309 \begin_inset space ~
13314 in the document font settings.
13317 \begin_layout Standard
13318 If you use non-TeX fonts for the document, you can only choose for math
13319 to use either the document's class default TeX font (in most cases
13320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13326 \begin_inset space ~
13332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13335 ) or to use the non-TeX variant of the document's class default font (in
13337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13343 \begin_inset space ~
13349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13355 \begin_layout Subsection
13356 Using Different Character Styles
13357 \begin_inset Index idx
13360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13367 \begin_inset Index idx
13370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13379 \begin_layout Standard
13380 As we've already seen, LyX automatically changes the character style for
13381 certain paragraph environments.
13382 LyX supports two character styles,
13391 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13395 \begin_layout Standard
13400 style, do one of the following:
13403 \begin_layout Itemize
13404 click on the toolbar button
13413 \begin_layout Itemize
13414 use the key binding
13423 \begin_layout Standard
13424 These commands are all toggles.
13429 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13432 \begin_layout Standard
13433 One typically uses the
13437 style for proper names.
13439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13446 is the original author of LyX.
13447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13453 \begin_layout Standard
13454 A more widely used character style is the
13459 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13466 \begin_layout Itemize
13467 clicking on the toolbar button
13476 \begin_layout Itemize
13477 using the keybindings
13486 \begin_layout Standard
13491 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or LaTeX-packag
13492 es use a different font.
13495 \begin_layout Standard
13496 We've been using the
13500 style all over the place in this document.
13501 Here's one more example:
13504 \begin_layout Quotation
13507 Do not overuse character styles!
13510 \begin_layout Standard
13511 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13512 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13513 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13514 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13518 \begin_layout Standard
13519 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13527 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13529 \begin_inset space ~
13532 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13538 arg "dialog-show character"
13544 \begin_layout Subsection
13545 Fine-Tuning with the
13550 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13552 name "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13557 \begin_inset Index idx
13560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13569 \begin_layout Standard
13570 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13571 LyX gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13572 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13573 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13574 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13575 from ordinary dialog.
13578 \begin_layout Standard
13579 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13580 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13581 \begin_inset Newline newline
13584 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13585 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13588 \begin_layout Standard
13589 To use custom character styles, open the
13591 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13593 \begin_inset space ~
13596 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13599 dialog or press the toolbar button
13602 arg "dialog-show character"
13606 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13607 font property that you can choose.
13608 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13611 \begin_inset space ~
13616 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13621 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13622 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13623 environments all at once.
13626 \begin_layout Standard
13627 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13630 \begin_inset space ~
13642 \begin_layout Labeling
13643 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13657 The possible options are:
13661 \begin_layout Labeling
13662 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13667 This is the Roman font family.
13668 Normally a serif font.
13669 It's also the default family.
13679 \begin_layout Labeling
13680 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13684 \begin_inset space ~
13691 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13703 \begin_layout Labeling
13704 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13711 This is the Typewriter font family.
13717 arg "font-typewriter"
13726 \begin_layout Labeling
13727 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13732 This corresponds to the print weight.
13737 \begin_layout Labeling
13738 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13743 This is the Medium font series.
13744 It's also the default series.
13747 \begin_layout Labeling
13748 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13755 This is the Bold font series.
13768 \begin_layout Labeling
13769 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13774 As the name implies.
13779 \begin_layout Labeling
13780 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13785 This is the Upright font shape.
13786 It's also the default shape.
13789 \begin_layout Labeling
13790 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13804 s the Italic font shape
13810 \begin_layout Labeling
13811 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13818 This is the Slanted font shape
13820 (although it might not be visible in LyX, this is different from italic).
13823 \begin_layout Labeling
13824 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13828 \begin_inset space ~
13835 This is the Small caps font shape
13842 \begin_layout Labeling
13843 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13848 Alters the text color.
13849 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
13853 \begin_inset space ~
13858 , which means that the document default color set in
13860 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13861 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13867 \begin_inset space ~
13872 is used, you can choose between
13905 \begin_inset Index idx
13908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13917 \begin_layout Labeling
13918 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13923 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
13924 the language of the document.
13925 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
13927 \begin_inset Newline newline
13930 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
13931 LaTeX respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
13932 When using the spell checking (see section
13933 \begin_inset space ~
13937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13939 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
13943 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
13946 \begin_layout Labeling
13947 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13952 Alters the size of the font.
13953 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
13954 proportional to the document font size.
13955 Once again, you don't feed LyX the details, but a general description of
13956 what you want to do.
13961 \begin_layout Labeling
13962 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13983 arg "font-size tiny"
13989 \begin_layout Labeling
13990 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14011 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14017 \begin_layout Labeling
14018 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14039 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14045 \begin_layout Labeling
14046 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14067 arg "font-size small"
14073 \begin_layout Labeling
14074 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14088 It's also the default size.
14092 arg "font-size normal"
14098 \begin_layout Labeling
14099 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14120 arg "font-size large"
14126 \begin_layout Labeling
14127 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14148 arg "font-size larger"
14154 \begin_layout Labeling
14155 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14176 arg "font-size largest"
14182 \begin_layout Labeling
14183 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14204 arg "font-size huge"
14210 \begin_layout Labeling
14211 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14232 arg "font-size giant"
14238 \begin_layout Labeling
14239 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14244 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14264 arg "font-size increase"
14270 \begin_layout Labeling
14271 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14276 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14296 arg "font-size decrease"
14303 \begin_layout Standard
14308 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14309 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14310 LyX automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14311 — use those instead.
14312 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14315 \begin_layout Labeling
14316 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14321 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14326 \begin_layout Labeling
14327 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14334 This is text with emphasize on
14337 This might seem like the same as
14341 , but it is actually a bit different.
14347 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14349 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14352 \begin_layout Labeling
14353 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14360 This is text with Underbar on.
14366 arg "font-underline"
14372 \begin_inset Newline newline
14377 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14378 when you could not change fonts.
14379 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14380 This is only possible in LyX because some people
14384 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14387 \begin_layout Labeling
14388 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14392 \begin_inset space ~
14399 This is text with Double underbar on.
14405 arg "font-underunderline"
14409 \begin_inset Newline newline
14412 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14413 about double underbar.
14416 \begin_layout Labeling
14417 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14421 \begin_inset space ~
14428 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14434 arg "font-underwave"
14438 \begin_inset Newline newline
14441 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14442 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14445 \begin_layout Labeling
14446 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14453 This is text with Strikeout on.
14459 arg "font-strikeout"
14463 \begin_inset Newline newline
14466 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14467 changed in the meantime.
14470 \begin_layout Labeling
14471 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14478 This is text with Noun on.
14485 , this is a logical attribute.
14486 Normally it's equivalent to
14489 \begin_inset space ~
14498 \begin_layout Standard
14499 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14500 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14502 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14504 \begin_inset space ~
14507 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14513 arg "dialog-show character"
14516 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14517 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14520 arg "textstyle-apply"
14524 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14528 \begin_layout Standard
14529 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14536 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14537 (suppose you just set the shape to
14538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14556 \begin_inset space ~
14568 \begin_layout Standard
14569 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14577 \begin_inset space ~
14589 \begin_layout Itemize
14595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14602 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14620 \begin_inset Newline newline
14624 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14638 \begin_inset Note Note
14641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14642 For more on phantoms see section
14643 \begin_inset space ~
14647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14649 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
14659 \begin_inset Newline newline
14665 \begin_layout Itemize
14670 fonts use characters with serifs.
14671 These are the small
14672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14679 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14680 The following example shows the difference:
14681 \begin_inset Newline newline
14685 \begin_inset Newline newline
14690 text without serifs
14693 \begin_inset Newline newline
14696 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14697 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14704 \begin_layout Itemize
14709 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14710 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14711 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14714 \begin_layout Standard
14715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14722 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14723 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14726 \begin_inset space ~
14731 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14732 the property to be removed.
14733 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14734 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14735 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14753 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14754 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14762 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14766 \begin_inset space ~
14771 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14782 If you, for example, set
14783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14801 \begin_inset space ~
14806 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
14808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14815 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
14818 \begin_layout Standard
14819 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
14820 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14823 \begin_layout Section
14824 Printing and Previewing
14827 \begin_layout Subsection
14831 \begin_layout Standard
14832 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
14833 using LyX, you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
14834 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
14835 goes on behind-the-scenes.
14836 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
14838 Additional Features
14843 \begin_layout Standard
14844 LyX uses the program LaTeX as its backend.
14845 LaTeX is just a macro package for the TeX typesetting system, but to prevent
14846 confusion, we will only refer to LaTeX.
14847 LyX is what you use to do your actual writing.
14848 Then, LyX calls LaTeX to turn your writing into printable output.
14849 This happens in two stages:
14852 \begin_layout Enumerate
14853 First, LyX converts your document to a series of text commands for LaTeX,
14854 generating a file with the extension,
14855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14869 \begin_layout Enumerate
14870 Next, LyX calls LaTeX to use the commands in the
14874 file to produce printable output.
14877 \begin_layout Subsection
14878 Output file formats
14879 \begin_inset Index idx
14882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14889 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14891 name "sub:Output-file-formats"
14898 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14899 Simple text (ASCII)
14900 \begin_inset Index idx
14903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14904 File formats ! ASCII
14912 \begin_layout Standard
14913 This file type has the extension
14914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14926 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
14927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14930 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
14931 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14937 \begin_layout Standard
14938 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
14940 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14941 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14943 \begin_inset space ~
14949 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
14950 a BibTeX bibliography (section
14951 \begin_inset space ~
14955 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14957 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
14962 If your document includes such material, use
14964 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14965 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14967 \begin_inset space ~
14971 \begin_inset space ~
14975 \begin_inset space ~
14983 \begin_inset space ~
14987 \begin_inset space ~
14993 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
14994 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
14997 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14999 \begin_inset Index idx
15002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15003 File formats ! LaTeX
15011 \begin_layout Standard
15012 This file type has the extension
15013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15024 and contains all commands that are necessary for the LaTeX program to process
15026 If you know LaTeX, you can use it to find out LaTeX-Errors or to process
15027 it manually with console commands.
15028 The LaTeX-file is automatically created in LyX's temporary directory whenever
15029 you view or export your document.
15032 \begin_layout Standard
15033 You can export your document as a LaTeX-file using the menu
15035 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15036 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15051 The different LaTeX export variants are explained in section
15052 \begin_inset space ~
15056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15058 reference "sub:Export"
15065 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15067 \begin_inset Index idx
15070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15079 \begin_layout Standard
15080 This file type has the extension
15081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15101 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15102 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15103 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15107 \begin_layout Standard
15108 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15109 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15110 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15111 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15112 when you view the DVI.
15113 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15116 \begin_layout Standard
15117 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15119 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15120 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15125 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15126 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15128 \begin_inset space ~
15135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15145 The latter option uses the program
15154 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15155 font access (see section
15156 \begin_inset space ~
15160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15162 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15167 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
15168 standard TeX processor.
15171 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15173 \begin_inset Index idx
15176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15177 File formats ! PostScript
15185 \begin_layout Standard
15186 This file type has the extension
15187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15199 PostScript was developed by the company
15203 as a printer language.
15204 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15206 PostScript can be seen as a
15207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15210 programming language
15211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15214 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15219 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the LaTeX-pack
15225 \begin_inset Index idx
15228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15229 LaTeX-packages ! pstricks
15239 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15242 \begin_layout Standard
15243 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15247 Encapsulated PostScript
15248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15251 (EPS, file extension
15252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15264 As LyX allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has
15265 to convert them in the background to EPS.
15266 If, for example, you have 50
15267 \begin_inset space ~
15270 images in your document, LyX has to do 50
15271 \begin_inset space ~
15274 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15275 This might slow down your workflow with LyX.
15276 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15277 EPS to avoid this problem.
15280 \begin_layout Standard
15281 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15283 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15284 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15290 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15292 \begin_inset Index idx
15295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15302 \begin_inset Index idx
15305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15314 \begin_layout Standard
15315 This file type has the extension
15316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15332 Portable Document Format
15333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15340 was derived from PostScript.
15341 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15350 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15351 looks exactly the same.
15354 \begin_layout Standard
15355 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15359 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15363 (JPG, file extension
15364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15391 Portable Network Graphics
15392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15395 (PNG, file extension
15396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15408 You can also use any other image format, because LyX converts them in the
15409 background to one of these formats.
15410 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15411 will slow down your workflow.
15412 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15415 \begin_layout Standard
15416 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15418 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15424 \begin_layout Description
15426 \begin_inset space ~
15429 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15433 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15436 \begin_layout Description
15438 \begin_inset space ~
15445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15452 X) This uses the program
15456 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15461 is a new engine, derived from
15465 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15466 access (see section
15467 \begin_inset space ~
15471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15473 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15478 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
15479 standard TeX processor.
15482 \begin_layout Description
15484 \begin_inset space ~
15491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15498 X) This uses the program
15502 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15507 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15508 font access (see section
15509 \begin_inset space ~
15513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15515 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15520 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15521 vertically written Japanese.
15524 \begin_layout Description
15526 \begin_inset space ~
15529 (cropped) This is the same as
15532 \begin_inset space ~
15537 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15538 This is for example useful if you want to use LyX to generate good-looking
15539 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15542 \begin_layout Description
15544 \begin_inset space ~
15547 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15551 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15555 \begin_layout Description
15557 \begin_inset space ~
15560 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15564 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15565 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15569 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15570 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15573 \begin_layout Standard
15577 \begin_inset space ~
15586 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15587 works without problems.
15588 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar \slash{}
15589 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15593 \begin_inset space ~
15600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15612 \begin_inset space ~
15619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15628 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15636 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15638 \begin_inset Index idx
15641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15642 FileFormats ! XHTML
15648 \begin_inset Index idx
15651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15660 \begin_layout Standard
15661 This file type has the extension
15662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15674 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15675 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15676 When LyX produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15677 suitable for the purpose.
15678 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15680 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15681 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15684 between different formats, which are described in section
15686 Math Output in XHTML
15691 \begin_inset space ~
15699 \begin_layout Standard
15700 XHTML output remains
15701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15708 , and not all LyX features are supported yet.
15711 LyX and the World Wide Web
15715 Additional Features
15717 manual, for more information.
15720 \begin_layout Standard
15721 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15723 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15724 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15730 \begin_layout Subsection
15732 \begin_inset Index idx
15735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15744 \begin_layout Standard
15745 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15746 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15755 or use the toolbar button
15762 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15763 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15764 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15770 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15774 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15776 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15780 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15782 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15787 Further output formats can be selected via
15789 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15790 View (Other Formats)
15792 or the toolbar button
15793 \begin_inset Graphics
15794 filename ../images/view-others.png
15796 groupId toolbarbuttons
15803 \begin_layout Standard
15804 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15805 viewer window using the menu
15807 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15812 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15813 Update (Other Formats)
15818 \begin_layout Standard
15819 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in LyX's temporary
15821 To have a real output, export your document.
15824 \begin_layout Subsection
15825 Printing the File from within LyX
15826 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15828 name "sub:Printing-the-File"
15835 \begin_layout Standard
15836 Instead of exporting your file and then printing it, you can also print
15837 it directly from within LyX.
15838 To print a file, select the menu
15840 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15846 arg "dialog-show print"
15849 ) or click on the toolbar button
15852 arg "dialog-show print"
15856 LyX will internally call LaTeX to produce a DVI.
15857 This file is then processed by the program
15861 to a PostScript-file, which is finally printed using the program
15866 Due to these steps in the background, this method is not the fastest.
15869 \begin_layout Standard
15870 You can set the following print parameters in the
15873 \begin_inset space ~
15881 \begin_layout Labeling
15882 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15887 This is the name of the printer to print to.
15891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15892 Note that this printer name is for the program
15901 has to be configured for this printer name.
15902 The default printer can be set in LyX's preferences dialog, see section
15903 \begin_inset space ~
15907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15909 reference "sub:Printer"
15918 The printer should understand PostScript.
15921 \begin_layout Labeling
15922 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15927 The name of a file to print to.
15928 The output will be a PostScript file.
15929 It will be written in LyX's working directory unless you specify the full
15933 \begin_layout Standard
15934 You can choose to print only a range of pages, only even-numbered or only
15935 odd-numbered pages or to print the pages in reverse — the latter options
15936 are useful for printing on two sides with a printer without a duplexer:
15937 you re-insert the pages after printing one set to print on the other side.
15938 Some printers spit out pages face-up, others, face-down.
15939 By choosing a particular order to print in, you can take the entire stack
15940 of pages out of the printer without needing to reorder them.
15943 \begin_layout Section
15944 A few Words about Typography
15945 \begin_inset Index idx
15948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15957 \begin_layout Subsection
15958 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
15959 \begin_inset Index idx
15962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15969 \begin_inset Index idx
15972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15981 \begin_layout Standard
15983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15994 character comes in four lengths: the
16006 , and the minus sign:
16007 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16013 \begin_layout Standard
16014 \begin_inset Tabular
16015 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16016 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
16017 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16018 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16019 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16020 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16049 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16089 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16114 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16116 \begin_inset space ~
16119 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16126 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16151 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16153 \begin_inset space ~
16156 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16177 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16211 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16217 \begin_layout Standard
16218 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16230 character multiple times in a row.
16231 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16232 the final output, but not in LyX.
16234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16238 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16250 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16254 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16264 \begin_layout Standard
16265 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16266 math mode and has a length of its own.
16267 Here are some examples:
16270 \begin_layout Enumerate
16271 line- and page-breaks
16272 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16282 \begin_layout Enumerate
16284 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16294 \begin_layout Enumerate
16295 Oh — there's a dash.
16296 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16306 \begin_layout Enumerate
16307 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16311 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16321 \begin_layout Subsection
16323 \begin_inset Index idx
16326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16333 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16335 name "sub:Hyphenation"
16342 \begin_layout Standard
16343 Words are not hyphenated within LyX but automatically in the output.
16344 Hyphenation is done by the LaTeX-package
16349 \begin_inset Index idx
16352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16353 LaTeX-packages ! babel
16358 following the rules of the document language.
16361 \begin_layout Standard
16362 LaTeX hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16367 font and with unusual constructs, like
16368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16376 If LaTeX cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points
16378 This is done with the menu
16380 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16381 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16383 \begin_inset space ~
16389 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to LaTeX.
16390 If no hyphenation is necessary, LaTeX will ignore them.
16393 \begin_layout Standard
16394 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16395 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16405 LaTeX would then see the hyphen
16406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16413 as a hyphenation possibility.
16414 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16415 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16416 as described in section
16417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16420 Prevent Hyphenation
16421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16427 \begin_inset space ~
16435 \begin_layout Subsection
16437 \begin_inset Index idx
16440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16449 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16450 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16451 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16453 name "sub:Abbreviations"
16460 \begin_layout Standard
16461 When LyX calls LaTeX to generate the final version of your document, LaTeX
16462 automatically distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16463 LaTeX then adds the
16464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16467 appropriate amount of space.
16468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16471 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16473 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16474 gets after another word.
16477 \begin_layout Standard
16478 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16479 not work in all cases.
16481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16492 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16493 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16496 \begin_layout Standard
16497 Here are some examples of
16501 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16504 \begin_layout Itemize
16509 \begin_layout Itemize
16514 \begin_layout Standard
16515 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16518 \begin_layout Itemize
16520 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16524 this is too much space!
16527 \begin_layout Itemize
16532 \begin_layout Standard
16533 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16536 \begin_layout Standard
16537 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16540 \begin_layout Enumerate
16544 \begin_inset space ~
16549 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16550 \begin_inset space ~
16554 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16556 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
16561 \begin_inset Index idx
16564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16565 Spaces ! inter-word
16573 \begin_layout Enumerate
16577 \begin_inset space ~
16582 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16583 \begin_inset space ~
16587 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16589 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
16594 \begin_inset Index idx
16597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16606 \begin_layout Enumerate
16610 \begin_inset space ~
16614 \begin_inset space ~
16618 \begin_inset space ~
16625 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16627 \begin_inset space ~
16632 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16633 This function is also bound to
16636 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16642 \begin_layout Standard
16643 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16646 \begin_layout Itemize
16648 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16652 \begin_inset space \space{}
16655 this is too much space!
16658 \begin_layout Itemize
16659 This is I\SpecialChar \@.
16663 \begin_layout Standard
16664 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16665 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because LaTeX
16666 will take care of this.
16669 \begin_layout Standard
16670 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16674 \begin_inset space ~
16679 feature described in the section
16685 Additional Features
16690 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16692 \begin_inset Index idx
16695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16696 Typography ! Quotes
16702 \begin_inset Index idx
16705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16736 \begin_layout Standard
16737 LyX usually sets quotes correctly.
16738 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16739 and use a closing quote at the end.
16741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16749 The keyboard character,
16753 , generates this automatically.
16756 \begin_layout Standard
16757 You can specify what character the
16761 key produces using the submenu
16767 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16771 \begin_inset Index idx
16774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16775 Document ! Settings
16785 There are six choices:
16788 \begin_layout Labeling
16789 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16812 \begin_layout Labeling
16813 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16816 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16820 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16826 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16830 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16836 \begin_layout Labeling
16837 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16840 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16844 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16850 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16854 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16860 \begin_layout Labeling
16861 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16864 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16868 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16874 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16878 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16884 \begin_layout Labeling
16885 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16888 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16892 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16898 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16902 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16908 \begin_layout Labeling
16909 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16912 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16916 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16922 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16926 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16932 \begin_layout Standard
16933 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
16936 arg "quote-insert single"
16942 \begin_layout Subsection
16944 \begin_inset Index idx
16947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16948 Typography ! Ligatures
16954 \begin_inset Index idx
16957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16986 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16988 name "sub:Ligatures"
16995 \begin_layout Standard
16996 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
16997 print them as single characters.
16998 These groups are known as
17003 Since LaTeX knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too
17005 Here are the standard ligatures:
17008 \begin_layout Itemize
17012 \begin_layout Itemize
17016 \begin_layout Itemize
17020 \begin_layout Itemize
17024 \begin_layout Itemize
17028 \begin_layout Standard
17029 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17032 \begin_layout Standard
17033 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17034 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17042 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17058 To break a ligature, use
17060 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17061 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17063 \begin_inset space ~
17070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17081 cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
17083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17098 Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
17100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17106 \begin_layout Subsection
17108 \begin_inset Index idx
17111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17118 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17120 name "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17127 \begin_layout Standard
17128 You will certainly have noticed that the word “LaTeX” always appears with
17129 characters in different sizes and positions.
17130 LaTeX is the name of the program used by LyX and is therefore recognized
17131 as a proper name when you type it in LyX as
17132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17151 \begin_inset Note Note
17154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17155 The braces in TeX Code are here to avoid that the Text appears as proper
17156 name in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
17161 Note the order of the upper- and lowercase letters! LyX recognizes the
17162 following proper names:
17165 \begin_layout Description
17166 LyX The name of the game, write
17167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17188 \begin_layout Description
17189 TeX The program used by LaTeX, write
17190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17211 \begin_layout Description
17212 LaTeX The program used by LyX, write
17213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17234 \begin_layout Description
17235 LaTeX2e The actual version of LaTeX, write
17236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17257 \begin_layout Standard
17258 You might wonder why the LaTeX-version is
17259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17263 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17271 It is an old tradition in the TeX-world to give programs geek version numbers.
17272 For example the version number of TeX converges to the number
17273 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17276 : The actual version is
17277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17284 , the previous one was
17285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17295 \begin_layout Standard
17296 If you don't want to use proper names, for example, in section headings,
17297 you can insert two empty braces in TeX Code in the word.
17298 In LyX this will look like
17299 \begin_inset Graphics
17300 filename clipart/LaTeX.png
17306 \begin_inset Newline newline
17309 For more about TeX Code, see section
17310 \begin_inset space ~
17314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17316 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
17323 \begin_layout Subsection
17325 \begin_inset Index idx
17328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17337 \begin_layout Standard
17338 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17339 space between two words.
17340 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17350 for units use the menu
17352 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17353 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17355 \begin_inset space ~
17363 arg "space-insert thin"
17369 \begin_layout Standard
17370 Here is an example to show the differences:
17373 \begin_layout Standard
17374 \begin_inset Tabular
17375 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17376 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
17377 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17378 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17385 \begin_inset space ~
17389 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17401 space between number and unit
17408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17413 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17417 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17429 half space between number and unit
17442 \begin_layout Subsection
17444 \begin_inset Index idx
17447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17448 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17456 \begin_layout Standard
17457 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17459 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17460 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17461 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17462 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17463 These bits of text became known as
17474 \begin_layout Standard
17475 Clearly, LyX can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17476 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17477 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17478 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17479 built into LaTeX governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there
17480 specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
17481 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17482 \begin_inset Newline newline
17490 \begin_inset Newline newline
17498 \begin_inset Newline newline
17501 to the LaTeX preamble of your document to avoid them.
17502 Some LaTeX books (such as
17503 \begin_inset space ~
17507 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17509 key "latexcompanion"
17514 \begin_inset space ~
17518 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17524 ) have more information about the technical details of LaTeX's page break
17528 \begin_layout Chapter
17529 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17530 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17532 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17539 \begin_layout Standard
17540 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17543 \begin_inset space ~
17549 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17552 \begin_layout Section
17554 \begin_inset Index idx
17557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17564 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17573 \begin_layout Standard
17574 LyX offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17577 \begin_layout Description
17579 \begin_inset space ~
17582 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17583 \begin_inset Newline newline
17587 \begin_inset Note Note
17590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17591 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17599 \begin_layout Description
17600 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17601 a LaTeX-comment when you export the document to LaTeX via the menu
17603 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17604 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17617 \begin_inset space ~
17623 \begin_inset Newline newline
17627 \begin_inset Note Comment
17630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17631 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in LaTeX-files.
17639 \begin_layout Description
17641 \begin_inset space ~
17644 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17645 set in the document settings under
17647 Colors\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17649 \begin_inset space ~
17655 \begin_inset Newline newline
17659 \begin_inset Newline newline
17663 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17672 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17673 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17678 of a comment that appears in the output.
17684 \begin_inset Newline newline
17688 \begin_inset Newline newline
17691 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17694 \begin_layout Standard
17695 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17703 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17707 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17710 \begin_layout Section
17712 \begin_inset Index idx
17715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17722 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17724 name "sec:Footnotes"
17731 \begin_layout Standard
17732 LyX uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the
17735 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17738 or the toolbar button
17741 arg "footnote-insert"
17753 \begin_inset Graphics
17754 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17763 This box is LyX's representation of your footnote.
17773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17792 label, the box will
17796 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17797 Clicking on the box label again will close
17810 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17811 and click on the footnote
17826 \begin_layout Standard
17827 Here is an example footnote:
17835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17836 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17844 \begin_layout Standard
17845 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17846 position where the footnote box is placed.
17847 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17848 The footnote number is calculated by LyX according to the document class.
17849 LyX does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get
17850 other schemes using special LaTeX-commands.
17855 ey are described in the
17858 \begin_inset space ~
17866 \begin_layout Section
17868 \begin_inset Index idx
17871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17880 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17887 \begin_layout Standard
17888 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in LyX.
17889 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17891 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17893 \begin_inset space ~
17898 or the toolbar button
17901 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17927 appearing within your text.
17928 This box is LyX's representation of your margin
17937 \begin_layout Standard
17938 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17942 \begin_inset Marginal
17945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17947 This is a marginal note.
17955 \begin_layout Standard
17956 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17957 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17958 pages, right on odd pages.
17961 \begin_layout Standard
17962 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17965 \begin_inset space ~
17973 \begin_inset space ~
17981 \begin_layout Section
17982 Graphics and Images
17983 \begin_inset Index idx
17986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17993 \begin_inset Index idx
17996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18003 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18005 name "sec:Graphics"
18012 \begin_layout Standard
18013 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18014 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18017 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18022 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18026 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18029 \begin_layout Standard
18030 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18035 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18036 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18038 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18039 \begin_inset space ~
18043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18045 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18052 \begin_layout Standard
18057 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18058 of the image in the output.
18059 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18063 \begin_inset space ~
18067 \begin_inset space ~
18076 \begin_inset space ~
18080 \begin_inset space ~
18084 \begin_inset space ~
18089 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18090 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18098 \begin_layout Standard
18105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18113 \begin_inset space ~
18117 \begin_inset space ~
18124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18133 tab LaTeX experts can specify additional LaTeX options.
18134 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside LyX.
18138 \begin_inset space ~
18143 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18144 with the image size is printed.
18148 \begin_inset space ~
18152 \begin_inset space ~
18156 \begin_inset space ~
18161 is explained in the
18164 \begin_inset space ~
18176 \begin_layout Standard
18177 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18178 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18180 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18183 \begin_layout Standard
18185 \begin_inset Graphics
18186 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18194 \begin_layout Standard
18195 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18196 the image into a float, see section
18197 \begin_inset space ~
18201 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18203 reference "sub:Figure-Floats"
18210 \begin_layout Subsection
18212 \begin_inset Index idx
18215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18222 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18224 name "sub:Image-Formats"
18231 \begin_layout Standard
18232 You can insert images in any known file format.
18233 But as we explained in section
18234 \begin_inset space ~
18238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18240 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
18244 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18245 LyX therefore uses the program
18249 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18250 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18251 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18252 \begin_inset space ~
18256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18258 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
18265 \begin_layout Standard
18266 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18269 \begin_layout Description
18271 \begin_inset space ~
18274 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18275 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18276 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18280 Graphics Interchange Format
18281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18284 (GIF, file extension
18285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18297 \begin_inset Index idx
18300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18332 Portable Network Graphics
18333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18336 (PNG, file extension
18337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18349 \begin_inset Index idx
18352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18384 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18388 (JPG, file extension
18389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18413 \begin_inset Index idx
18416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18447 \begin_layout Description
18449 \begin_inset space ~
18452 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18454 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18455 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18456 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18457 \begin_inset Newline newline
18460 Scalable image formats can be
18461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18464 Scalable Vector Graphics
18465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18468 (SVG, file extension
18469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18481 \begin_inset Index idx
18484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18516 Encapsulated PostScript
18517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18520 (EPS, file extension
18521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18533 \begin_inset Index idx
18536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18568 Portable Document Format
18569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18572 (PDF, file extension
18573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18585 \begin_inset Index idx
18588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18603 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18604 result will not be scalable.
18605 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18611 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18619 \begin_layout Standard
18620 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18627 \begin_layout Subsection
18628 Grouping of Image Settings
18629 \begin_inset Index idx
18632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18633 Images ! Settings grouping
18641 \begin_layout Standard
18642 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18644 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18645 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18647 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18648 need to manually change each of them.
18652 \begin_layout Standard
18653 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18656 \begin_inset space ~
18660 \begin_inset space ~
18675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18683 \begin_inset space ~
18687 \begin_inset space ~
18694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18704 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18705 and checking the name of the desired group.
18708 \begin_layout Section
18710 \begin_inset Index idx
18713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18720 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18729 \begin_layout Standard
18730 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18733 arg "tabular-insert"
18738 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18742 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18743 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18744 from the rest of the table.
18745 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18746 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18748 Here is an example table:
18751 \begin_layout Standard
18753 \begin_inset Tabular
18754 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18755 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
18756 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18757 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18758 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18759 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18959 \begin_layout Subsection
18963 \begin_layout Standard
18964 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18967 More\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18971 This brings up the table dialog.
18972 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18973 cursor is placed currently.
18974 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18975 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18976 done on all of your selection.
18979 \begin_layout Standard
18980 In addition to the table dialog, the
18983 \begin_inset space ~
18988 helps you in setting table properties.
18989 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18992 \begin_layout Standard
18996 \begin_inset space ~
19001 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
19002 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
19003 current cell respectively.
19004 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
19006 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
19007 of text, see section
19008 \begin_inset space ~
19012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19014 reference "sub:Table-Cells"
19021 \begin_layout Standard
19022 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
19023 using the check box
19032 This will merge the cells to
19036 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
19037 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
19038 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
19039 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
19040 in the last row without the upper border:
19043 \begin_layout Standard
19045 \begin_inset Tabular
19046 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19047 <features rotate="0" firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19048 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19049 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19050 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19051 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19062 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19071 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19147 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19182 \begin_layout Standard
19183 Adept users can declare special LaTeX-arguments for the table.
19184 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19185 explained in the chapter
19192 \begin_inset space ~
19198 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19199 These rotations are not visible in LyX but are visible in the output.
19202 \begin_layout Standard
19203 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19211 Most DVI-viewers are
19215 able to display rotations.
19223 \begin_layout Standard
19228 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19233 adds lines for all cell borders.
19236 \begin_layout Subsection
19238 \begin_inset Index idx
19241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19242 Tables ! Longtables
19248 \begin_inset Index idx
19251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19260 \begin_layout Standard
19261 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19264 \begin_inset space ~
19268 \begin_inset space ~
19277 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19278 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19281 \begin_layout Description
19286 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19287 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19288 except for the first page, if
19291 \begin_inset space ~
19299 \begin_layout Description
19303 \begin_inset space ~
19308 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19309 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19312 \begin_layout Description
19317 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19318 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19319 except for the last page, if
19322 \begin_inset space ~
19330 \begin_layout Description
19334 \begin_inset space ~
19339 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19340 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19343 \begin_layout Description
19344 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19345 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19347 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
19351 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19354 \begin_inset space ~
19362 \begin_layout Standard
19363 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19364 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19365 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19371 In this context, first means first in this order:
19374 \begin_inset space ~
19386 \begin_inset space ~
19391 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19394 \begin_layout Standard
19396 \begin_inset Tabular
19397 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19398 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19399 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19400 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19401 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19402 <row endfirsthead="true">
19403 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19409 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19414 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19423 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19433 <row endfirsthead="true">
19434 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19445 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19454 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19466 <row endhead="true">
19467 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19478 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19487 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19497 <row endhead="true">
19498 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19509 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19518 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19530 <row endfoot="true">
19531 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19542 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19551 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19582 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20523 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20532 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20541 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20552 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20583 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20614 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20645 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20676 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20707 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20738 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20769 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20800 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20831 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20862 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20893 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20924 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20955 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20986 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21017 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21048 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21079 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21110 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21141 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21172 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21203 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21234 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21265 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21296 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21327 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21358 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21389 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21420 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21451 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21482 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21512 <row endlastfoot="true">
21513 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21524 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21533 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21550 \begin_layout Subsection
21552 \begin_inset Index idx
21555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21562 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21564 name "sub:Table-Cells"
21571 \begin_layout Standard
21572 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21573 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21574 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21575 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21579 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21582 \begin_layout Standard
21583 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21584 for the column in the table dialog.
21585 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21586 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21590 \begin_layout Standard
21592 \begin_inset Tabular
21593 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21594 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
21595 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21596 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21597 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21617 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21686 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21742 This is longer now.
21747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21798 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21799 This is longer now.
21804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21830 \begin_layout Standard
21831 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21832 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21837 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21838 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21844 Selection with the mouse or with
21848 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21849 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21850 the selection from outside the table.
21853 \begin_layout Section
21855 \begin_inset Index idx
21858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21865 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21874 \begin_layout Subsection
21878 \begin_layout Standard
21879 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21880 have a fixed location.
21882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21889 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21897 \begin_inset space ~
21902 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21903 too many notes on the current page.
21906 \begin_layout Standard
21907 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21908 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21909 and pages without text.
21910 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21911 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21912 Floats are therefore numbered.
21913 Referencing is described in section
21914 \begin_inset space ~
21918 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21920 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21927 \begin_layout Standard
21928 To insert a float, use the menu
21930 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21934 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21935 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21937 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21938 \begin_inset Index idx
21941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21947 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21948 paragraph within the float.
21949 To keep your LyX-document readable, you can open and close the float box
21950 by left-clicking on the box label.
21951 A closed float box looks like this:
21952 \begin_inset Graphics
21953 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21958 – a gray button with a red label.
21961 \begin_layout Standard
21962 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible LaTeX-errors
21963 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21966 \begin_layout Subsection
21968 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21970 name "sub:Figure-Floats"
21975 \begin_inset Index idx
21978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21979 Floats ! Figure floats
21987 \begin_layout Standard
21989 \begin_inset space ~
21993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21995 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21999 was created using the menu
22001 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22002 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22008 arg "float-insert figure"
22012 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
22015 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22021 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22025 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
22026 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
22028 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22030 \begin_inset space ~
22038 arg "layout-paragraph"
22044 \begin_layout Standard
22045 \begin_inset Float figure
22050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22052 \begin_inset Graphics
22053 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22063 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22066 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22068 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22072 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22085 \begin_layout Standard
22086 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22087 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22089 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22098 ) and refer to it using the menu
22100 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22106 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22110 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22111 vague references like
22112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22119 , because, as LaTeX will reposition the floats in the final document, it
22121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22129 For more about cross-references, see section
22130 \begin_inset space ~
22134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22136 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22143 \begin_layout Standard
22144 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22145 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22146 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22147 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22148 as described in section
22149 \begin_inset space ~
22153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22155 reference "sub:List-of-Figures"
22161 \begin_inset space ~
22165 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22167 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22171 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22172 You can also set the images one below the other.
22174 \begin_inset space ~
22178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22180 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22185 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22187 reference "fig:Platypus"
22191 are the subfigures.
22194 \begin_layout Standard
22195 \begin_inset Float figure
22200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22201 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22205 \begin_inset Float figure
22210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22211 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22214 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22216 name "fig:Undefinable"
22228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22229 \begin_inset Graphics
22230 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22241 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22245 \begin_inset Float figure
22250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22251 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22254 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22256 name "fig:Platypus"
22268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22269 \begin_inset Graphics
22270 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22282 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22289 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22292 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22294 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22298 Two distorted images.
22311 \begin_layout Subsection
22313 \begin_inset Index idx
22316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22317 Floats ! Table floats
22325 \begin_layout Standard
22326 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22328 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22329 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22332 or the toolbar button
22335 arg "float-insert table"
22339 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22340 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22341 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22343 \begin_inset space ~
22347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22349 reference "tab:Table-float"
22356 \begin_layout Standard
22357 \begin_inset Float table
22362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22363 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22366 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22368 name "tab:Table-float"
22380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22382 \begin_inset Tabular
22383 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22384 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
22385 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22386 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22387 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22514 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22535 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22538 \end{array}\right]$
22546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22559 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22580 \begin_layout Subsection
22582 \begin_inset Index idx
22585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22594 \begin_layout Standard
22595 LyX offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22596 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22597 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22599 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22607 \begin_inset space ~
22615 \begin_layout Section
22617 \begin_inset Index idx
22620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22629 \begin_layout Standard
22630 LaTeX provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
22632 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22633 \begin_inset space \space{}
22640 \begin_layout Standard
22641 Minipages in LyX have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22643 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22647 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22648 and its alignment within the page.
22651 \begin_layout Standard
22653 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22663 height_special "totalheight"
22666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22669 This is a minipage.
22670 The text is set in an italic style.
22673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22676 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22677 another formatting.
22685 \begin_layout Standard
22686 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22689 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22693 as described in section
22694 \begin_inset space ~
22698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22700 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
22705 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22711 \begin_layout Standard
22712 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22722 height_special "totalheight"
22725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22726 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22727 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22733 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22737 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22747 height_special "totalheight"
22750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22751 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22752 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22760 \begin_layout Standard
22761 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22767 \begin_layout Standard
22768 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22770 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22777 \begin_inset space ~
22785 \begin_layout Chapter
22786 Mathematical Formulas
22787 \begin_inset Index idx
22790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22797 \begin_inset Index idx
22800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22829 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22831 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22838 \begin_layout Standard
22839 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22844 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22847 \begin_layout Section
22849 \begin_inset Index idx
22852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22861 \begin_layout Standard
22862 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22875 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22877 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22878 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22879 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22881 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22887 \begin_layout Standard
22888 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22892 \begin_inset space ~
22897 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22900 \begin_layout Standard
22901 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22902 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22905 \begin_layout Standard
22906 This is a line with an inline formula
22907 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22913 \begin_layout Standard
22914 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22915 paragraph, like this one:
22916 \begin_inset Formula
22923 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22926 \begin_layout Standard
22927 LyX also supports many LaTeX math commands.
22928 For example, typing
22929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22942 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22943 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22947 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22950 \begin_inset space ~
22958 \begin_layout Subsection
22959 Navigating in Formulas
22960 \begin_inset Index idx
22963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22972 \begin_layout Standard
22973 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22974 achieved with the arrow keys.
22975 LyX uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22976 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22981 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22982 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22986 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22990 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22993 \end{array}\right]$
23001 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
23006 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
23007 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
23010 \begin_layout Standard
23015 , printed in this document as
23016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23020 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23027 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
23028 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
23029 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
23034 For example, if you want
23035 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23043 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23053 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23057 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23062 , since in the latter case only the
23065 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23070 will be under the square root sign:
23071 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23077 \begin_layout Standard
23078 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23080 \begin_inset Formula
23082 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23091 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23092 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23095 \begin_layout Subsection
23099 \begin_layout Standard
23100 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23101 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23105 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23106 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23107 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23108 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23109 but not in a normal text region in LyX.
23112 \begin_layout Subsection
23113 Exponents and Subscripts
23114 \begin_inset Index idx
23117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23124 \begin_inset Index idx
23127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23136 \begin_layout Standard
23137 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23140 arg "math-superscript"
23146 arg "math-subscript"
23149 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23151 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23154 , type in a formula
23157 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23167 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23173 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23177 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23183 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23189 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23198 , you have to use an extra
23202 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23203 For example, if you want
23204 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23210 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23216 Subscripts are similar: To get
23217 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23223 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23231 \begin_layout Subsection
23233 \begin_inset Index idx
23236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23245 \begin_layout Standard
23246 Create a fraction either with the command
23252 or by using the icon
23255 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23261 \begin_inset space ~
23267 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23268 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23269 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23274 To move back up, press
23279 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23280 \begin_inset Formula
23282 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23285 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23293 \begin_layout Subsection
23295 \begin_inset Index idx
23298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23307 \begin_layout Standard
23308 Roots can be created using the
23311 \begin_inset space ~
23319 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23325 arg "math-insert \\root"
23347 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23353 always produces a square root.
23356 \begin_layout Subsection
23357 Operators with Limits
23358 \begin_inset Index idx
23361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23368 \begin_inset Index idx
23371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23378 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23380 name "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23387 \begin_layout Standard
23389 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23393 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23396 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23397 These limits can be entered in LyX by entering them as you would enter
23398 a super- or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23399 The sum operator will automatically place its
23400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23407 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23409 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23413 \begin_inset Formula
23415 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23420 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23424 \begin_layout Standard
23425 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23427 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23428 behind the operator and using the menu
23430 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23431 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23433 \begin_inset space ~
23437 \begin_inset space ~
23451 \begin_layout Standard
23452 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23461 \begin_inset Index idx
23464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23471 \begin_inset Formula
23473 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23478 which will place the
23479 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23491 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23492 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23498 \begin_layout Standard
23499 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23506 Have a look at section
23507 \begin_inset space ~
23511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23513 reference "sub:Functions"
23517 for an explanation of function macros.
23520 \begin_layout Subsection
23522 \begin_inset Index idx
23525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23534 \begin_layout Standard
23535 Most math symbols can be found in the
23538 \begin_inset space ~
23543 under one of several categories; including
23560 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23564 \begin_layout Standard
23565 If you know the LaTeX-command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
23566 you don't have to use the
23569 \begin_inset space ~
23574 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23575 LyX will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23578 \begin_layout Subsection
23580 \begin_inset Index idx
23583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23592 \begin_layout Standard
23593 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23598 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23604 \begin_inset space ~
23612 arg "math-insert \\space"
23616 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23617 For example, the sequence
23622 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
23626 \begin_inset Graphics
23627 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23632 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23633 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23634 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23635 Some markers for the space size appear red in LyX, because they are negative
23637 Here are two examples:
23640 \begin_layout Standard
23650 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23656 \begin_layout Standard
23666 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
23672 \begin_layout Subsection
23674 \begin_inset Index idx
23677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23686 name "sub:Functions"
23693 \begin_layout Standard
23697 \begin_inset space ~
23702 contains under the button
23705 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23708 a number of function macros, such as
23709 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23713 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23721 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23728 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23729 avoid confusions, because
23730 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23734 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23740 \begin_layout Standard
23741 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23743 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23747 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23753 \begin_layout Standard
23754 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23755 are placed, as described in section
23756 \begin_inset space ~
23760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23762 reference "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23769 \begin_layout Subsection
23771 \begin_inset Index idx
23774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23783 \begin_layout Standard
23784 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23786 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23787 You can also use LaTeX commands, for example, to enter
23788 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23791 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23792 Our example is entered by typing
23797 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23804 \begin_inset space ~
23808 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23810 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23814 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23817 \begin_layout Standard
23818 \begin_inset Float table
23823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23824 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23827 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23829 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23833 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23843 \begin_inset Tabular
23844 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23845 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
23846 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23847 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23848 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23932 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23986 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24040 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24094 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24148 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24202 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24256 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24310 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24364 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24409 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24430 \begin_layout Standard
24431 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24434 \begin_inset space ~
24442 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24445 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24449 \begin_layout Section
24450 Brackets and Delimiters
24451 \begin_inset Index idx
24454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24461 \begin_inset Index idx
24464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24471 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24473 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24480 \begin_layout Standard
24481 There are several brackets available through LyX.
24482 For some purposes, using just the keys
24487 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24488 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24489 toolbar delimiter icon
24492 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24496 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24497 \begin_inset Formula
24499 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24507 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24508 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24512 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24515 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24521 \begin_inset Formula
24523 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24531 \begin_layout Standard
24532 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24533 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24537 \begin_layout Standard
24538 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24539 left side and right side.
24540 If you use the option
24543 \begin_inset space ~
24548 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24549 The selection will be shown as TeX code.
24550 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24555 It will appear in LyX with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24558 \begin_layout Standard
24559 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24560 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24561 is to go inside the brackets.
24562 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24567 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24568 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24569 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24573 arg "math-delim ( )"
24579 \begin_layout Section
24580 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24581 \begin_inset Index idx
24584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24591 \begin_inset Index idx
24594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24601 \begin_inset Index idx
24604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24605 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24613 \begin_layout Standard
24614 Matrices are entered in LyX using the
24617 \begin_inset space ~
24625 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24629 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24630 Here is an example:
24631 \begin_inset Formula
24633 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24642 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24643 \begin_inset space ~
24647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24649 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24654 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24655 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24656 This alignment is set in the box
24661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24709 for every column as default.
24710 For example, the sequence
24711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24722 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24723 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24724 corresponds to the relevant column.
24725 The result will look like this:
24726 \begin_inset Formula
24729 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
24730 column & has & has\,right\\
24731 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
24740 \begin_layout Standard
24741 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24744 arg "newline-insert newline"
24747 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24748 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24750 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24753 or the math toolbar.
24756 \begin_layout Standard
24757 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24758 It can be created with the menu
24760 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24761 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24763 \begin_inset space ~
24775 Here is an example:
24776 \begin_inset Formula
24790 \begin_layout Standard
24791 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24794 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24797 arg "newline-insert newline"
24801 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24806 arg "newline-insert newline"
24809 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24817 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24818 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24819 A new row is created by every further entry of
24822 arg "newline-insert newline"
24826 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24827 Here is an example:
24828 \begin_inset Formula
24830 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24831 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24836 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24837 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24838 \begin_inset Formula
24840 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24848 \begin_layout Standard
24849 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24856 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24857 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24860 reference "eq:asquared"
24865 The other types are described in section
24866 \begin_inset space ~
24870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24872 reference "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
24879 \begin_layout Section
24880 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24881 \begin_inset Index idx
24884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24885 Math ! Formula numbering
24891 \begin_inset Index idx
24894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24895 Math ! Referencing formulas
24901 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24903 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24910 \begin_layout Standard
24911 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24913 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24914 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24916 \begin_inset space ~
24920 \begin_inset space ~
24928 arg "math-number-toggle"
24932 The formula number appears in LyX within parentheses.
24933 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24934 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24935 the document class.
24936 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24937 separated by a dot:
24938 \begin_inset Formula
24948 arg "math-number-toggle"
24951 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24952 You can only number displayed formulas.
24955 \begin_layout Standard
24956 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24958 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24959 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24961 \begin_inset space ~
24965 \begin_inset space ~
24973 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24976 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24977 \begin_inset Formula
24980 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24986 To number all lines use the shortcut
24989 arg "math-number-toggle"
24995 \begin_layout Standard
24996 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24999 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
25000 A label is inserted with the menu
25002 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25011 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
25012 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
25013 It is recommended that you use the suggested
25014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25025 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
25026 label type when you have many labels in your document.
25027 We inserted in the following example the label
25028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25035 in the second line:
25036 \begin_inset Formula
25038 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25039 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25044 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25045 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25046 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25048 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25050 \begin_inset space ~
25058 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25062 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25063 The reference appears in LyX as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25064 as the formula number:
25067 \begin_layout Standard
25068 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25071 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25078 \begin_layout Standard
25079 The properties of LyX's cross-reference box are described in section
25080 \begin_inset space ~
25084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25086 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25091 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25099 \begin_layout Section
25100 User defined math macros
25101 \begin_inset Index idx
25104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25113 \begin_layout Standard
25114 LyX allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25115 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25116 Math macros are explained in section
25119 \begin_inset space ~
25131 \begin_layout Section
25135 \begin_layout Subsection
25137 \begin_inset Index idx
25140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25149 \begin_layout Standard
25150 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25151 To set a font in a formula, use the
25154 \begin_inset space ~
25162 arg "math-insert \\font"
25165 , or enter its command, listed in table
25166 \begin_inset space ~
25170 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25172 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25179 \begin_layout Standard
25180 \begin_inset Float table
25185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25186 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25189 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25191 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25195 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25205 \begin_inset Tabular
25206 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25207 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
25208 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25209 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25241 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25268 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25295 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25328 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25355 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25382 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25416 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25443 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25477 \begin_layout Standard
25478 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25486 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25502 \begin_layout Standard
25503 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25504 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25509 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25510 space when you need a space in the box.
25511 Here is an example where
25512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25523 denotes the set of numbers:
25524 \begin_inset Formula
25526 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
25534 \begin_layout Standard
25535 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25536 You can, for example, put a character in
25545 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25549 \begin_inset Newline newline
25552 So it is better not to use this feature.
25555 \begin_layout Standard
25556 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25557 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25561 \begin_inset Newline newline
25564 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25570 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25571 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25577 \begin_layout Standard
25584 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25587 \begin_layout Standard
25588 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25590 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25591 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25593 \begin_inset space ~
25601 \begin_layout Subsection
25603 \begin_inset Index idx
25606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25615 \begin_layout Standard
25616 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25618 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25622 \begin_inset space ~
25626 \begin_inset space ~
25634 \begin_inset space ~
25642 arg "math-insert \\font"
25646 Math text appears in LyX in black instead of blue.
25647 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25648 Here is an example:
25649 \begin_inset Formula
25652 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25653 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25662 \begin_layout Subsection
25664 \begin_inset Index idx
25667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25676 \begin_layout Standard
25677 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25678 automatically chosen in most situations.
25696 For most characters,
25704 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25705 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25710 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25711 situations, all text will be set in the styles that LaTeX thinks are appropriat
25713 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25716 arg "math-insert \\style"
25720 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25721 For example, you can set
25722 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25725 , which is normally in
25734 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25738 The four styles are used in the following example:
25741 \begin_layout Standard
25742 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25746 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25750 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25754 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25760 \begin_layout Standard
25761 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25762 is set in a particular size with the menu
25764 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25766 \begin_inset space ~
25771 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25772 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25773 will be adjusted to correspond.
25774 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25785 \begin_layout Standard
25789 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25795 \begin_layout Section
25797 \begin_inset Index idx
25800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25807 \begin_inset Index idx
25810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25819 \begin_layout Standard
25820 LyX supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society
25821 (AMS) that are in common use.
25824 \begin_layout Subsection
25825 Enabling AMS-Support
25828 \begin_layout Standard
25829 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25830 the document by selecting the checkbox
25833 \begin_inset space ~
25837 \begin_inset space ~
25841 \begin_inset space ~
25848 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25852 \begin_inset Index idx
25855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25856 Document ! Settings
25864 \begin_inset space ~
25870 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get LaTeX-errors in
25871 formulas, ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25874 \begin_layout Subsection
25876 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25878 name "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
25883 \begin_inset Index idx
25886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25887 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25895 \begin_layout Standard
25896 AMS-LaTeX provides a selection of different formula types.
25897 LyX allows you to choose between
25918 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25919 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25925 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25928 \begin_layout Chapter
25932 \begin_layout Section
25934 \begin_inset Index idx
25937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25944 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25946 name "sec:Cross-References"
25953 \begin_layout Standard
25954 One of LyX's strengths is cross-references.
25955 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25957 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25958 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25959 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25962 \begin_layout Enumerate
25966 \begin_layout Enumerate
25967 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25969 name "enu:Second-item"
25976 \begin_layout Enumerate
25980 \begin_layout Standard
25981 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25983 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25986 or by pressing the toolbar button
25993 A gray label box like this:
25994 \begin_inset Graphics
25995 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
26000 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
26001 LyX offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
26003 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26036 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26037 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26053 \begin_layout Standard
26054 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26056 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26059 or the toolbar button
26062 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26066 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26067 \begin_inset Graphics
26068 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
26073 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26075 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26088 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26092 \begin_layout Standard
26093 As an alternative to
26095 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26098 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26103 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26104 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26106 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26118 \begin_layout Standard
26119 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26120 \begin_inset space ~
26124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26126 reference "enu:Second-item"
26133 \begin_layout Standard
26134 It is recommended to use a protected space
26138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26139 described in section
26140 \begin_inset space ~
26144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26146 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
26155 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26156 line breaks between them.
26159 \begin_layout Standard
26160 There are six formats of cross-references:
26163 \begin_layout Description
26164 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26165 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26167 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26174 \begin_layout Description
26175 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26176 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26186 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26188 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26195 \begin_layout Description
26196 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26197 \begin_inset space ~
26201 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26202 LatexCommand pageref
26203 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26210 \begin_layout Description
26212 \begin_inset space ~
26216 \begin_inset space ~
26219 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26220 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26221 LatexCommand vpageref
26222 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26227 \begin_inset Newline newline
26230 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26231 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26232 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26233 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26234 it prints “on the next page”.
26235 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26238 \begin_layout Description
26240 \begin_inset space ~
26244 \begin_inset space ~
26248 \begin_inset space ~
26251 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26254 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26259 \begin_inset Newline newline
26262 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26268 ; otherwise it behaves like
26272 \begin_inset space ~
26276 \begin_inset space ~
26285 \begin_layout Description
26287 \begin_inset space ~
26290 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26291 \begin_inset Newline newline
26295 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26303 This feature is only available when you have the LaTeX-package
26312 \begin_inset Index idx
26315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26316 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
26322 \begin_inset Index idx
26325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26326 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
26337 \begin_inset Newline newline
26340 You can select which LaTeX-package should be used for this feature by setting
26343 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26347 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26348 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26356 is the default and preferred because
26360 supports only English documents.
26361 The format is specified by using the command
26373 (refstyle) in the LaTeX preamble of the document.
26374 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26387 ) can be done with this command
26388 \begin_inset Newline newline
26395 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26400 \begin_inset Newline newline
26403 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26405 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26407 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26414 \begin_layout Description
26416 \begin_inset space ~
26419 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26421 LatexCommand nameref
26422 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26429 \begin_layout Standard
26430 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26431 is automatically calculated by LaTeX.
26432 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26436 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26440 \begin_layout Standard
26441 You can only use the style
26445 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26449 is always possible.
26452 \begin_layout Standard
26453 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26454 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26456 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26457 \begin_inset space ~
26461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26463 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26470 \begin_layout Standard
26471 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26475 \begin_inset space ~
26479 \begin_inset space ~
26484 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26485 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26488 \begin_inset space ~
26493 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26494 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26497 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26503 \begin_layout Standard
26504 You can change labels at any time.
26505 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26506 do not need to think about this.
26509 \begin_layout Standard
26510 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in LyX
26511 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output
26512 instead of the reference.
26515 \begin_layout Standard
26516 References are described in detail in the section
26517 \begin_inset space ~
26521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26531 \begin_inset space ~
26539 \begin_layout Section
26540 Table of Contents and other Listings
26541 \begin_inset Index idx
26544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26551 \begin_inset Index idx
26554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26561 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26570 \begin_layout Subsection
26572 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26574 name "sub:Table-of-Contents"
26581 \begin_layout Standard
26582 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26584 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26585 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26587 \begin_inset space ~
26591 \begin_inset space ~
26597 It is displayed in LyX as a gray box.
26598 If you click on it, the
26602 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26603 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26604 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26606 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26608 \begin_inset space ~
26613 that is described in section
26614 \begin_inset space ~
26618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26620 reference "sub:The-Outliner"
26627 \begin_layout Standard
26628 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26629 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26631 \begin_inset space ~
26635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26637 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26641 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26643 \begin_inset space ~
26647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26649 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
26653 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26655 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26658 \begin_layout Subsection
26659 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26660 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26662 name "sub:List-of-Figures"
26669 \begin_layout Standard
26670 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26672 You can insert them via the
26674 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26678 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26681 \begin_layout Section
26682 URLs and Hyperlinks
26683 \begin_inset Index idx
26686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26693 \begin_inset Index idx
26696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26705 \begin_layout Subsection
26707 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26716 \begin_layout Standard
26717 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26719 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26725 \begin_layout Standard
26726 Here is an example URL: LyX's homepage:
26727 \begin_inset Flex URL
26730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26740 \begin_layout Standard
26741 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26747 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26751 \begin_layout Standard
26752 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26760 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get LaTeX errors.
26768 \begin_layout Subsection
26770 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26772 name "sub:Hyperlinks"
26779 \begin_layout Standard
26780 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26782 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26785 or with the toolbar button
26792 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26801 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26802 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26803 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26805 name "LyX's homepage"
26806 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26810 , an Email address like this:
26811 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26813 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26814 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26819 , or a link to a file.
26822 \begin_layout Standard
26823 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26836 to the link target.
26839 \begin_layout Standard
26840 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26841 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26842 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26843 the text style dialog.
26844 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26848 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26850 name "LyX's homepage"
26851 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26858 \begin_layout Standard
26859 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26863 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26865 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26866 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26870 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26872 \begin_inset Newline newline
26880 \begin_inset Newline newline
26887 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26890 \begin_layout Section
26892 \begin_inset Index idx
26895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26902 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26904 name "sec:Appendices"
26911 \begin_layout Standard
26912 Appendices are created with the menu
26914 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26916 \begin_inset space ~
26920 \begin_inset space ~
26926 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26927 as the appendix part of the book.
26928 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26931 \begin_layout Standard
26932 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26933 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26934 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26935 and the subsection number.
26936 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26940 \begin_layout Standard
26942 \begin_inset space ~
26946 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26948 reference "chap:Credits"
26953 \begin_inset space ~
26957 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26959 reference "sub:Export"
26966 \begin_layout Section
26968 \begin_inset Index idx
26971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26978 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26980 name "sec:Bibliography"
26987 \begin_layout Standard
26988 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a LyX-document.
26989 You can include a bibliography database,
26993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26994 Known under the name
26995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27007 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
27008 manually, using the paragraph environment
27012 , which was described in section
27013 \begin_inset space ~
27017 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27019 reference "sub:Biblio_environment"
27024 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
27025 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
27029 use a bibliography database.
27032 \begin_layout Subsection
27033 The Bibliography Environment
27036 \begin_layout Standard
27041 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27043 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27052 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27054 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about LaTeX
27056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27063 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27066 \begin_layout Standard
27067 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27069 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27072 or the toolbar button
27075 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27079 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27080 containing the available citations.
27081 Select one or more keys from the list and
27091 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27092 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27096 \begin_layout Standard
27097 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27098 entry with surrounding brackets.
27103 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27104 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27116 \begin_layout Standard
27119 LaTeX Companion Second Edition
27122 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27124 key "latexcompanion"
27131 \begin_layout Standard
27132 The LyX-Team members are listed in the Credits:
27133 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27142 \begin_layout Standard
27143 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27146 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27148 \begin_inset space ~
27156 arg "layout-paragraph"
27160 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27163 \begin_layout Subsection
27164 Bibliography databases (BibTeX)
27165 \begin_inset Index idx
27168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27169 Bibliography ! Databases
27175 \begin_inset Index idx
27178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27179 Bibliography ! BibTeX
27185 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27187 name "sub:Bibliography-databases"
27194 \begin_layout Standard
27195 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27201 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27203 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27204 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27209 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27211 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27212 your working field in a database.
27213 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27214 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27215 list for that document.
27216 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27220 \begin_layout Standard
27221 The database is a text file with the file extension
27222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27233 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27234 The format is explained in
27235 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27241 and in the LaTeX books (
27242 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27244 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27249 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27250 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27251 A list of such programs is maintained on the LyX Wiki at
27252 \begin_inset Flex URL
27255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27257 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27265 \begin_layout Standard
27266 To use a database, use the menu
27268 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27273 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27286 \begin_inset space ~
27292 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27293 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27300 Add bibliography to TOC
27302 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27307 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27308 in the document or just the cited references.
27311 \begin_layout Standard
27312 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27324 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27325 Your LaTeX distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27326 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27328 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27334 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27335 \begin_inset Newline newline
27339 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27341 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27353 \begin_layout Standard
27354 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27357 \begin_layout Standard
27358 To generate the bibliography from a database, LyX uses the program BibTeX.
27359 You can choose which of its variants should be used by LyX as the
27365 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27366 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27371 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27372 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27373 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27388 The following variants are possible:
27391 \begin_layout Description
27392 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27393 with other bibliography packages (e.
27394 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27398 \begin_inset space \space{}
27405 ), only with the package
27409 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27413 \begin_layout Description
27414 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27415 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27416 with all bibliography packages, except
27421 \begin_layout Description
27422 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27427 , works with all bibliography packages
27430 \begin_layout Standard
27431 BibTeX can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27433 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27439 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27448 \begin_layout Standard
27449 When you select the option
27451 Sectioned bibliography
27455 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27456 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27459 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27460 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27462 Customizing Bibliographies
27470 Additional Features
27475 \begin_layout Standard
27476 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27477 the two methods of creating them.
27478 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27479 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27480 We used the style file
27484 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27487 \begin_layout Subsection
27488 Bibliography layout
27489 \begin_inset Index idx
27492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27493 Bibliography ! Layout
27501 \begin_layout Standard
27502 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27503 For this feature you need to enable the option
27509 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27513 \begin_inset Index idx
27516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27517 Document ! Settings
27527 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27528 For the global citation format use the BibTeX style files as explained
27529 in the previous section.
27532 \begin_layout Standard
27533 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27534 the citation reference window.
27535 Here is an example where the text
27536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27540 \begin_inset space ~
27544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27547 appears after the reference:
27550 \begin_layout Standard
27552 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27555 key "latexcompanion"
27562 \begin_layout Section
27564 \begin_inset Index idx
27567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27574 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27583 \begin_layout Standard
27584 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27586 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27588 \begin_inset space ~
27593 or the toolbar button
27600 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27601 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27602 by LyX as the index entry.
27605 \begin_layout Standard
27606 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27608 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27609 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27611 \begin_inset space ~
27617 A light blue box labeled
27618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27629 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27630 The index list box is not clickable like other LyX-boxes.
27633 \begin_layout Standard
27634 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27635 For a detailed description of LaTeX's index mechanism, have a look at one
27637 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27639 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27646 \begin_layout Subsection
27647 Grouping Index Entries
27648 \begin_inset Index idx
27651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27660 \begin_layout Standard
27661 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27663 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27664 lists under the entry
27665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27673 First we create the entry
27674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27682 \begin_inset space ~
27686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27688 reference "sub:Lists"
27693 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27694 \begin_inset space ~
27698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27700 reference "sec:Itemize"
27704 , we insert the command
27707 \begin_layout Standard
27713 \begin_layout Standard
27717 \begin_layout Standard
27723 \begin_layout Standard
27724 for the enumerated list in section
27725 \begin_inset space ~
27729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27731 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27738 \begin_layout Standard
27739 The exclamation mark
27740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27747 marks the grouping levels.
27748 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27749 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27750 If we don't have an index entry for
27751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27758 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27761 \begin_layout Subsection
27763 \begin_inset Index idx
27766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27767 Index ! Page ranges
27775 \begin_layout Standard
27776 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27778 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27779 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27780 an index entry in section
27781 \begin_inset space ~
27785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27787 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27794 \begin_layout Standard
27797 Paragraph environments|(
27800 \begin_layout Standard
27801 and another entry at the end of section
27802 \begin_inset space ~
27806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27808 reference "sub:LyX-Code"
27815 \begin_layout Standard
27818 Paragraph environments|)
27821 \begin_layout Standard
27823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27846 respectively start and end the index range.
27847 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27848 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27849 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27850 An example is the index entry
27851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27854 Document ! Settings
27855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27861 \begin_layout Subsection
27863 \begin_inset Index idx
27866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27867 Index ! Cross referencing
27875 \begin_layout Standard
27876 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27877 We referred for example in the index entry
27878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27886 \begin_inset space ~
27890 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27892 reference "sub:Image-Formats"
27896 ) to the index entry
27897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27904 in the same section using the entry
27907 \begin_layout Standard
27910 GIF|see{Image formats}
27913 \begin_layout Standard
27914 where the braces have to be inserted as TeX Code.
27915 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27916 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27919 \begin_layout Subsection
27921 \begin_inset Index idx
27924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27925 Index ! Entry order
27933 \begin_layout Standard
27934 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27935 follow the rules for the index order.
27936 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but LaTeX
27940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27941 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27943 \begin_inset space ~
27947 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27949 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27958 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27959 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27968 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27972 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27976 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27980 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27984 \begin_inset Index idx
27987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27988 Dummy entries ! maïs
27994 \begin_inset Index idx
27997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27998 Dummy entries ! maître
28004 \begin_inset Index idx
28007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28008 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
28013 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
28014 maïs, maison, maître.
28015 To achieve this, we use the command
28018 \begin_layout Standard
28021 previous entry@current entry
28024 \begin_layout Standard
28025 In our case we want to have
28026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28041 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28044 \begin_layout Standard
28050 \begin_layout Standard
28051 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28052 You can also use another word to tell LaTeX the entry order.
28053 See the next subsection for an example.
28056 \begin_layout Standard
28057 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28063 \begin_layout Standard
28064 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28069 to generate the index (see sec.
28070 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28074 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28076 reference "sub:Index-Program"
28085 would for example print the index entry for the LaTeX-package aeguill in
28087 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28093 reference "sub:Document-Font"
28097 after the index entries of the other LaTeX-packages although all these
28098 index commands start with
28099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28111 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28116 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28119 \begin_layout Standard
28131 \begin_layout Standard
28143 \begin_layout Subsection
28145 \begin_inset Index idx
28148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28149 Index ! Entry layout
28157 \begin_layout Standard
28158 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28159 \begin_inset Index idx
28162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28165 This is an italic dummy entry
28170 You can also format the page number using the character
28171 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28175 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28178 followed by a LaTeX-command without a backslash.
28179 We can write for example
28182 \begin_layout Standard
28185 italic page number:|textit
28188 \begin_layout Standard
28189 to get the page number in italic.
28190 \begin_inset Index idx
28193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28194 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28199 Normally all LaTeX-commands begin with a backslash, but in this special
28201 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28209 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28217 \begin_inset space ~
28223 Have a look at section
28224 \begin_inset space ~
28228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28230 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28234 to learn more about the LaTeX-syntax.
28237 \begin_layout Standard
28238 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28246 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28250 to generate the index, see sec.
28251 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28257 reference "sub:Index-Program"
28266 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28271 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28272 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28275 key "latexcompanion"
28287 \begin_layout Standard
28288 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28290 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28291 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28292 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28293 If so, put the following in the preamble
28296 \begin_layout Standard
28308 \begin_layout Standard
28312 \begin_layout Standard
28318 \begin_layout Standard
28319 in the index entry.
28320 \begin_inset Index idx
28323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28324 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28329 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28330 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28331 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28334 \begin_layout Standard
28335 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28336 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28337 a bold font for all index entries.
28338 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28350 documentation for details,
28351 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28353 key "makeindex,xindy"
28360 \begin_layout Subsection
28362 \begin_inset Index idx
28365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28372 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28374 name "sub:Index-Program"
28381 \begin_layout Standard
28382 If the index generation program
28386 is installed, LyX uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28390 , the program that is part of every LaTeX distribution, is used.
28394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28399 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28400 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28401 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28402 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28403 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28413 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in LyX's preferences
28414 dialog, see section
28415 \begin_inset space ~
28419 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28421 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
28426 The available options are listed and explained in
28427 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28429 key "makeindex,xindy"
28434 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28438 \begin_layout Standard
28439 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28440 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar \slash{}
28443 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28444 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28448 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28449 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28452 \begin_layout Subsection
28456 \begin_layout Standard
28457 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28458 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28466 next to the standard index.
28467 LaTeX does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28468 that add this feature.
28474 \begin_inset Index idx
28477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28478 LaTeX-packages ! splitidx
28483 package to generate multiple indexes.
28484 The package is included in all recent LaTeX distributions.
28488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28489 If yours does not ship it, consult the TeX-catalogue,
28490 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28497 Note that the package does not only consist of a LaTeX style, but it also
28498 includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28499 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28507 \begin_layout Standard
28508 To set up LyX for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28510 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28511 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28514 and select the option
28516 Use multiple Indexes
28523 already contains the standard index
28524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28532 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28533 also appear as a heading) to the
28537 input field and press the
28542 The new index now also appears in the list.
28543 If you like, you can attribute an alternative LyX label color to the new
28547 \begin_layout Standard
28548 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28551 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28558 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28559 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28560 are additional features:
28563 \begin_layout Itemize
28564 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28565 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28568 \begin_layout Itemize
28569 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28570 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28578 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28579 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28580 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28581 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28584 \begin_layout Section
28585 Nomenclature/Glossary
28586 \begin_inset Index idx
28589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28596 \begin_inset Index idx
28599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28628 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28630 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28637 \begin_layout Standard
28638 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28639 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28640 called nomenclature or glossary.
28643 \begin_layout Standard
28644 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the LaTeX package
28650 \begin_inset Index idx
28653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28654 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
28660 You find it in the TeX-catalogue,
28661 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28667 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
28670 \begin_layout Standard
28671 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28672 and then use the menu
28674 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28680 \begin_inset space ~
28685 or the toolbar button
28688 arg "nomencl-insert"
28693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28704 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28707 \begin_layout Standard
28708 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28709 The first is the term or
28713 that you wish to define.
28718 of the term or symbol.
28721 \begin_layout Standard
28722 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28730 You have to enter valid LaTeX-code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28738 \begin_layout Subsection
28739 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28740 \begin_inset Index idx
28743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28744 Nomenclature ! Layout
28752 \begin_layout Standard
28753 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28757 field as LaTeX-formulas.
28759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28763 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28771 \begin_inset Newline newline
28779 \begin_inset Newline newline
28785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28792 character starts/ends the formula.
28793 The LaTeX-command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning
28795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28805 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28815 \begin_layout Standard
28816 (A short introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
28817 \begin_inset space ~
28821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28823 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28830 \begin_layout Standard
28834 \begin_inset space ~
28839 dialog to format the description text; you have to use LaTeX-commands.
28840 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28845 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28852 in this document is:
28853 \begin_inset Newline newline
28858 dummy entry for the character
28863 \begin_inset Newline newline
28875 \begin_inset space ~
28885 font use the command
28914 \begin_layout Standard
28915 If the characters |
28916 \begin_inset space \space{}
28920 \begin_inset space \space{}
28924 \begin_inset space \space{}
28928 \begin_inset space \space{}
28932 \begin_inset space \space{}
28935 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28936 a quote character in front of them.
28937 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28938 LatexCommand nomenclature
28939 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28940 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
28947 \begin_layout Subsection
28948 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28949 \begin_inset Index idx
28952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28953 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28961 \begin_layout Standard
28962 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the LaTeX-code of
28963 the symbol definition.
28964 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
28966 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28969 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28970 LatexCommand nomenclature
28972 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
28979 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28983 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28984 LatexCommand nomenclature
28987 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
28992 They will be sorted by
28993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29005 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29019 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29022 will be sorted before the
29026 since the character
29027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29034 is considered in sorting.
29037 \begin_layout Standard
29038 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29041 \begin_inset space ~
29046 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29047 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29049 For the example given, you can insert
29053 in this field for the
29054 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29061 will be located before
29062 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29068 \begin_layout Standard
29069 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29074 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29083 \begin_layout Subsection
29084 Nomenclature Options
29085 \begin_inset Index idx
29088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29089 Nomenclature ! Options
29097 \begin_layout Standard
29102 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29103 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29106 \begin_layout Description
29107 refeq Appends the phrase
29108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29123 to every nomenclature entry, where
29129 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29132 \begin_layout Description
29133 refpage Appends the phrase
29134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29149 to every nomenclature entry, where
29155 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29158 \begin_layout Description
29159 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29162 \begin_layout Standard
29163 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29164 class options list in the
29166 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29170 In this document the options
29177 \begin_layout Standard
29178 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29184 \begin_layout Standard
29185 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29186 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29191 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29194 \begin_layout Description
29204 \begin_layout Description
29207 nomrefpage Like the
29214 \begin_layout Description
29217 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29226 \begin_layout Description
29230 \begin_inset space ~
29236 \begin_inset space ~
29241 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29244 \begin_layout Standard
29246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29253 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29254 If not, add these lines to your LaTeX preamble:
29257 \begin_layout Standard
29265 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29268 \begin_inset Newline newline
29275 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29280 \begin_inset Newline newline
29284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29299 by their translation.
29302 \begin_layout Subsection
29303 Printing the Nomenclature
29304 \begin_inset Index idx
29307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29308 Nomenclature ! Printing
29316 \begin_layout Standard
29317 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29319 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29320 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29336 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29337 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29338 You can choose between these settings:
29341 \begin_layout Description
29342 Default a space of 1
29343 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29349 \begin_layout Description
29351 \begin_inset space ~
29355 \begin_inset space ~
29358 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29361 \begin_layout Description
29362 Custom custom space
29365 \begin_layout Standard
29366 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29375 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29383 For example, in order to change the name to
29387 , add the following line to the preamble:
29390 \begin_layout Standard
29398 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29401 \begin_layout Subsection
29402 Nomenclature Program
29403 \begin_inset Index idx
29406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29407 Nomenclature ! Program
29413 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29415 name "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
29422 \begin_layout Standard
29423 LyX uses the program
29427 , that is part of every LaTeX distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29428 LyX's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29433 by adding options, see section
29434 \begin_inset space ~
29438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29440 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
29445 The available options are listed and explained in
29446 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29448 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29455 \begin_layout Section
29457 \begin_inset Index idx
29460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29467 \begin_inset Index idx
29470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29471 Document ! Branches
29477 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29479 name "sec:Branches"
29486 \begin_layout Standard
29487 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29488 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29489 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29490 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29493 \begin_layout Standard
29494 For these cases LyX allows you to put text into branches.
29495 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29496 To create a branch, either select the menu
29498 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29499 Branch\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29502 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29504 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29511 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29512 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29513 its background color inside LyX and whether the name of the branch should
29514 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29515 (see below for an example).
29516 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29517 to the name of the other) and to add
29518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29526 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29530 \begin_inset space ~
29533 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29534 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29537 \begin_layout Standard
29538 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29539 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29541 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29544 where you can choose a branch.
29545 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29549 \begin_layout Standard
29550 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29551 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29554 \begin_layout Standard
29555 \begin_inset Branch Question
29558 \begin_layout Standard
29559 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29567 \begin_layout Standard
29568 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29571 \begin_layout Standard
29572 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29580 \begin_layout Standard
29587 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29588 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29591 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29592 Consider for example a file
29593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29600 which has the above branches.
29602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29609 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29633 branch were inactive,
29634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29649 branch was active, likewise
29650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29665 branch was active, and
29666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29669 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29673 if both branches were active.
29674 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29677 \begin_layout Standard
29678 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29684 \begin_layout Standard
29685 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29686 like inside equations, you can code special LaTeX definitions for each
29688 For example you can define for the question branch
29692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29693 For an introduction to the LaTeX-syntax, see section
29694 \begin_inset space ~
29698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29700 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29712 \begin_layout Standard
29722 \begin_layout Standard
29732 \begin_layout Standard
29733 and for the answer branch
29736 \begin_layout Standard
29746 \begin_layout Standard
29756 \begin_layout Standard
29757 \begin_inset Branch Question
29760 \begin_layout Standard
29764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29792 \begin_layout Standard
29793 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29796 \begin_layout Standard
29800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29828 \begin_layout Standard
29829 Now it is possible to use the
29833 question{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29840 answer{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29843 commands to obtain conditional output.
29844 Here is an example formula where only the
29851 \begin_inset Formula
29853 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29861 \begin_layout Standard
29862 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29870 \begin_layout Standard
29871 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29873 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29877 \begin_inset space \space{}
29880 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own LaTeX commands.).
29881 For this advanced usage, see the
29886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29889 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29896 \begin_layout Section
29898 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29900 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29905 \begin_inset Index idx
29908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29917 \begin_layout Standard
29920 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29921 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29924 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29926 All these options are provided by the LaTeX-package
29931 \begin_inset Index idx
29934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29935 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
29940 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29941 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29942 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
29943 part of the document.
29947 \begin_layout Standard
29948 The header information in the dialog tab
29952 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29953 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
29954 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29955 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29959 \begin_inset space ~
29963 \begin_inset space ~
29968 is set, LyX tries to extract the header information from your document
29969 title and author entries.
29973 \begin_inset space ~
29977 \begin_inset space ~
29981 \begin_inset space ~
29986 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
29989 \begin_layout Standard
29990 You can specify in the dialog tab
29994 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
29999 \begin_inset space ~
30003 \begin_inset space ~
30007 \begin_inset space ~
30012 option allows long links to be split;
30015 \begin_inset space ~
30019 \begin_inset space ~
30023 \begin_inset space ~
30031 \begin_inset space ~
30036 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30039 \begin_inset space ~
30044 colors the different links.
30045 The default colors are:
30048 \begin_layout Labeling
30049 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30054 for hyperlinks and URLs
30057 \begin_layout Labeling
30058 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30066 \begin_layout Labeling
30067 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30075 \begin_layout Standard
30076 but you can change these in the field
30081 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30084 \begin_layout Standard
30087 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30090 \begin_layout Standard
30095 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30096 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30097 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30100 \begin_layout Standard
30105 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30106 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30107 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30117 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30118 when opening the PDF.
30120 \begin_inset space ~
30123 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30124 \begin_inset space ~
30127 1 will only display the sections.
30130 \begin_layout Standard
30131 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30132 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30138 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30139 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30148 \begin_layout Section
30149 TeX Code and the LaTeX Syntax
30150 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30152 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30159 \begin_layout Subsection
30161 \begin_inset Index idx
30164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30173 name "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30180 \begin_layout Standard
30181 As LyX uses LaTeX in the background, it supports many LaTeX commands and
30182 constructs, but not all.
30183 LaTeX contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30184 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30185 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30186 is a LaTeX-package for every problem, though LyX cannot support all packages
30187 and their commands.
30190 \begin_layout Standard
30191 But don't worry, you can use any LaTeX-command directly in LyX inside the
30193 A TeX Code box is created by the menu
30195 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30208 \begin_inset space ~
30213 or by the toolbar button
30226 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30234 \begin_layout Standard
30235 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as TeX Code.
30236 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard LyX text.
30237 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30238 using the LaTeX-command
30244 , you can write the command part
30250 in a TeX Code box before the word and the closing brace
30254 in a second TeX Code box behind the word.
30255 The word between the two TeX Code boxes is then the argument as it is in
30256 the following example:
30259 \begin_layout Standard
30260 \begin_inset Graphics
30261 filename clipart/ERT.png
30269 \begin_layout Standard
30273 \begin_layout Standard
30274 This is a line with a
30278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30301 \begin_layout Standard
30302 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30310 At the end of LaTeX-commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30311 to let LaTeX know that the command is finished.
30319 \begin_layout Subsection
30320 A Short Introduction to the LaTeX Syntax
30321 \begin_inset Argument 1
30324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30331 \begin_inset Index idx
30334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30341 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30343 name "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
30350 \begin_layout Standard
30351 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30352 about the LaTeX-commands that LyX uses in the background.
30353 Because LaTeX is based on commands, you can
30354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30362 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30363 any time if you know the right commands.
30364 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30365 is the end of the day.
30366 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30367 all caption labels bold.
30368 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30370 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30374 \begin_layout Standard
30375 Now LaTeX comes into play.
30376 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a LaTeX-package.
30377 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the LaTeX package
30379 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30388 \begin_layout Standard
30389 As result you find that the package
30394 \begin_inset Index idx
30397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30398 LaTeX-packages ! caption
30404 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30406 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30409 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
30416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30424 \begin_inset space ~
30432 \begin_layout Standard
30437 usepackage[options]{package name}
30440 \begin_layout Standard
30441 All LaTeX commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30442 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30443 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30446 \begin_layout Standard
30447 In your case the package name is
30452 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30457 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30458 So you add the command
30461 \begin_layout Standard
30466 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30469 \begin_layout Standard
30470 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30475 For more commands provided by the
30479 package, have a look at its documentation,
30480 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30494 \begin_layout Standard
30495 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30497 For example if you use a
30501 class, you don't need the package
30505 , you can instead write
30508 \begin_layout Standard
30513 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30518 \begin_layout Standard
30519 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30520 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30521 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30528 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30531 \begin_layout Standard
30532 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30533 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30535 To insert a LaTeX-command in text, use the TeX Code box as described in
30536 the previous section.
30539 \begin_layout Standard
30540 If you want to learn more about LaTeX and its syntax, have a look at the
30542 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30544 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30551 \begin_layout Standard
30552 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30558 \begin_layout Standard
30562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30572 \begin_inset Note Note
30575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30576 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30584 \begin_layout Left Header
30585 \begin_inset Argument 1
30588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30608 \begin_inset Note Note
30611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30612 defines the header line as described below
30620 \begin_layout Center Header
30621 \begin_inset Argument 1
30624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30633 \begin_layout Right Header
30634 \begin_inset Argument 1
30637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30658 \begin_layout Left Footer
30659 \begin_inset Argument 1
30662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30683 \begin_layout Center Footer
30684 \begin_inset Argument 1
30687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30698 \begin_inset Newline newline
30702 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30708 \begin_layout Right Footer
30709 \begin_inset Argument 1
30712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30734 \begin_layout Section
30735 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30736 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30738 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30743 \begin_inset Index idx
30746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30747 Document ! Header/Footer line
30753 \begin_inset Index idx
30756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30765 \begin_layout Standard
30766 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30770 \begin_inset space ~
30781 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30787 \begin_inset space ~
30793 As a second step add in the menu
30795 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30796 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30803 Custom Header/Footerlines
30804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30808 This module offers the following 6
30809 \begin_inset space ~
30815 \begin_layout Description
30817 \begin_inset space ~
30821 \begin_inset space ~
30825 \begin_inset space ~
30829 \begin_inset space ~
30833 \begin_inset space ~
30839 \begin_layout Description
30841 \begin_inset space ~
30845 \begin_inset space ~
30849 \begin_inset space ~
30853 \begin_inset space ~
30857 \begin_inset space ~
30863 \begin_layout Standard
30864 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30867 \begin_layout Standard
30868 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30869 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30871 \begin_inset space ~
30875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30877 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30881 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30884 \begin_layout Standard
30885 \begin_inset Float figure
30891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30894 \begin_inset Tabular
30895 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30896 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
30897 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30898 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30899 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30901 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30919 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30930 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30948 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30959 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30963 The normal text on the page goes here.
30964 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
30966 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
30967 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
30972 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30981 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30992 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31010 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31021 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31039 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31057 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31060 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31062 name "fig:Page-layout"
31066 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31079 \begin_layout Standard
31080 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31088 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31092 \begin_inset space ~
31097 is set to “Default”.
31098 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31107 \begin_layout Subsection
31111 \begin_layout Standard
31112 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31113 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31114 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31115 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31117 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31118 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31121 \begin_layout Standard
31122 For the definition, you will need some LaTeX-commands that are inserted
31125 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31138 \begin_inset space ~
31146 \begin_layout Description
31149 thepage prints the current page number
31152 \begin_layout Description
31155 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31158 \begin_layout Description
31161 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31164 \begin_layout Description
31167 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31168 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31171 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31175 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31178 because it usually goes in a left header.
31181 \begin_layout Description
31184 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31185 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31187 It is normally used in the right header.
31190 \begin_layout Subsection
31191 Default header/footer
31194 \begin_layout Standard
31195 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31196 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31197 footer has the page number.
31198 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31199 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31200 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31203 \begin_inset space ~
31211 \begin_layout Subsection
31215 \begin_layout Standard
31216 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31217 Some pages are different.
31218 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31219 a new part or chapter in your book.
31220 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31221 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31222 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31225 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31226 Header and footer decoration line
31229 \begin_layout Standard
31230 By default, you get a 0.4
31231 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31234 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31235 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31247 in the following way:
31250 \begin_layout Standard
31257 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31260 \begin_layout Standard
31261 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31270 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31271 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31277 \begin_layout Standard
31278 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of LaTeX.
31279 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
31280 \begin_inset space ~
31284 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31293 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31294 Several header/footer lines
31297 \begin_layout Standard
31298 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31299 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31300 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31302 To expand the height, redefine the LaTeX length
31316 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31317 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31330 \begin_inset space ~
31338 \begin_layout Standard
31345 headheight}{height}
31348 \begin_layout Standard
31349 where height is a size in standard units.
31350 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31351 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31352 Then open the LaTeX logfile with the menu
31354 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31371 \begin_inset space ~
31376 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31381 \begin_inset Index idx
31384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31385 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
31391 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31392 for your header/footer.
31395 \begin_layout Subsection
31399 \begin_layout Standard
31400 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31401 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31402 This example consists of the following definition:
31405 \begin_layout Description
31407 \begin_inset space ~
31416 , empty optional argument
31419 \begin_layout Description
31421 \begin_inset space ~
31424 Header empty, empty optional argument
31427 \begin_layout Description
31429 \begin_inset space ~
31438 in the optional argument
31441 \begin_layout Description
31443 \begin_inset space ~
31452 in the optional argument
31455 \begin_layout Description
31457 \begin_inset space ~
31469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31473 \begin_inset Newline newline
31477 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31484 in the optional argument
31487 \begin_layout Description
31489 \begin_inset space ~
31498 , empty optional argument
31501 \begin_layout Description
31504 headrulewidth set to 2
31505 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31511 \begin_layout Standard
31512 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31513 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31519 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31528 \begin_layout Standard
31529 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31535 \begin_layout Standard
31539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31543 pagestyle{headings}
31549 \begin_inset Note Note
31552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31553 switches back to page style with the default headings
31561 \begin_layout Section
31562 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31563 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31565 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31570 \begin_inset Index idx
31573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31580 \begin_inset Index idx
31583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31592 \begin_layout Standard
31593 LyX allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the
31594 fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31595 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31598 \begin_layout Subsection
31602 \begin_layout Standard
31603 To get previews working, you need the LaTeX package
31608 \begin_inset Index idx
31611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31612 LaTeX-packages ! preview-latex
31617 (on some systems named simply
31622 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the TeX-catalogue,
31624 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31630 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
31631 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31639 package; for LyX on Windows this program and also the LaTeX-package are
31640 automatically installed together with LyX.
31643 \begin_layout Subsection
31647 \begin_layout Standard
31648 If you would for example like to see in LyX your math formulas typeset by
31649 LaTeX, activate the option
31652 \begin_inset space ~
31659 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31665 \begin_inset space ~
31669 \begin_inset space ~
31672 feel\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31679 \begin_inset space ~
31692 \begin_inset space ~
31697 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31700 \begin_layout Standard
31701 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by LaTeX,
31705 \begin_inset space ~
31713 \begin_inset space ~
31721 \begin_layout Standard
31722 Previews are generated when you load a document into LyX and when you finish
31726 \begin_layout Standard
31727 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31735 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31736 generated by activating the option
31739 \begin_inset space ~
31745 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31753 \begin_layout Subsection
31754 Selected document parts
31757 \begin_layout Standard
31758 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31759 for example things that LyX cannot render like rotated parts or things
31760 that are not yet supported by LyX.
31761 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31763 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31767 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31768 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31769 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31772 \begin_layout Standard
31773 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the LaTeX command
31779 which is not yet supported by LyX.
31783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31790 is explained in section
31792 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31797 \begin_inset space ~
31807 Instead of the TeX Code boxes you want to see in LyX the final rotated
31808 boxes, for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding
31810 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31812 Here is the result:
31815 \begin_layout Standard
31816 \begin_inset Preview
31818 \begin_layout Standard
31823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31827 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31833 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31843 height_special "totalheight"
31846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31871 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31877 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31899 \begin_layout Standard
31900 Previewing works also for colors.
31901 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the LaTeX
31912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31919 is explained in section
31926 \begin_inset space ~
31939 \begin_layout Standard
31940 \begin_inset Preview
31942 \begin_layout Standard
31946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31965 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
31970 This is text within a colored, framed box.
31974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31989 \begin_layout Standard
31990 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
31996 \begin_layout Standard
31997 If LyX does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
31998 above and also make sure that TeX Code in the preview inset is valid and
31999 that you loaded the LaTeX packages in your document preamble that are required
32001 If LyX cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able
32002 to view your document due to LaTeX errors.
32003 So if you have to use some TeX Code and don't know if it is correct, the
32004 preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the
32008 \begin_layout Subsection
32012 \begin_layout Standard
32013 You can preview the LaTeX source of the whole document or parts of it.
32016 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32018 \begin_inset space ~
32023 and a window will be shown where you can see the LaTeX-source code.
32024 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32026 You can also select document parts in LyX's main window, then only this
32027 selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32028 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32029 the source view window.
32034 , you can see the changes as you make them in LyX; but note that if you
32035 have several documents open, this will slow things down as LyX updates
32036 them all, not just the one which is open at the time.
32039 \begin_layout Section
32040 Advanced Find and Replace
32041 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32043 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32048 \begin_inset Index idx
32051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32058 \begin_inset Index idx
32061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32070 \begin_layout Subsection
32074 \begin_layout Standard
32075 The advanced find and replace feature of LyX allows for searching of complex,
32076 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within LyX documents.
32077 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32078 The key-features are:
32081 \begin_layout Itemize
32082 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32083 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32084 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32088 \begin_layout Itemize
32089 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32090 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32091 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32092 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32095 \begin_layout Itemize
32096 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32097 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32098 outside of mathematics environments
32101 \begin_layout Itemize
32102 Search may be widened to a specific
32107 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32111 \begin_inset space ~
32114 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32115 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32122 \begin_layout Itemize
32123 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32124 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32125 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32129 \begin_inset space ~
32132 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32135 \begin_layout Subsection
32139 \begin_layout Standard
32140 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32142 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32155 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32158 ) or the toolbar button
32161 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32167 Advanced Find and Replace
32172 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32176 \begin_layout Standard
32181 LyX mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32185 \begin_inset space ~
32190 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32193 arg "paragraph-break"
32197 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32198 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32202 arg "paragraph-break"
32205 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32209 searches backwards.
32212 \begin_layout Standard
32216 \begin_inset space ~
32221 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32230 \begin_inset space ~
32235 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32238 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32239 Searching for mathematics
32242 \begin_layout Standard
32243 Mathematical formulas, such as
32244 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32247 or something more complex like
32248 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32251 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32256 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32257 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32258 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32259 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32265 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32269 \begin_layout Standard
32270 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32271 This is done by switching to the
32275 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32280 This way, entering in the
32287 \begin_layout Itemize
32288 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32289 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32292 \begin_layout Itemize
32293 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32294 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32297 \begin_layout Itemize
32298 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32299 of it only within section headings.
32300 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32301 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32305 \begin_layout Itemize
32306 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32307 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32310 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32314 \begin_layout Standard
32315 The entries made in the
32319 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32322 \begin_inset space ~
32328 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32332 button or alternatively press
32335 arg "paragraph-break"
32342 while the cursor is in the
32345 \begin_inset space ~
32353 \begin_layout Standard
32354 You can replace with fully-featured formatted LyX entries.
32355 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32359 \begin_layout Itemize
32360 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32361 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32369 with its typewriter version
32370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32384 \begin_layout Itemize
32385 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32391 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32403 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32410 (you may want to enable the
32413 \begin_inset space ~
32421 \begin_inset space ~
32426 options and disable the
32434 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32442 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32443 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32447 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
32450 , or occurrences of
32451 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32455 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32461 \begin_layout Subsection
32465 \begin_layout Standard
32466 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32471 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32473 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32475 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32484 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32490 This is done with the context menu
32492 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32493 Insert Regular Expression
32495 while the cursor is in the
32500 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32501 expression matching rules
32505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32506 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed LyX
32508 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32512 \begin_inset space ~
32515 when matching LaTeX code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed
32516 to match expressions.
32521 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32522 same text in the document.
32523 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32524 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32527 \begin_layout Enumerate
32528 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32533 editor the fraction
32534 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32538 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32541 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32542 fractions with the given denominator.
32545 \begin_layout Enumerate
32546 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32558 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32563 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32564 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32565 Also, by inserting a
32566 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32569 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32570 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32573 \begin_layout Standard
32574 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32575 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32576 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32579 , and referring back to them through
32580 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32584 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32588 For example, try searching with the regexp
32589 \begin_inset Newline newline
32592 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32595 \begin_inset Newline newline
32598 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32601 \begin_layout Standard
32602 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32605 \begin_layout Standard
32606 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32614 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32615 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32616 sub-expressions is absolute.
32618 \begin_inset space ~
32622 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32625 always refers to the first occurrence of
32626 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32629 in all entered regexps.
32637 \begin_layout Section
32639 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32641 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32646 \begin_inset Index idx
32649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32658 \begin_layout Standard
32659 LyX has a built-in spell checker.
32662 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32669 key or the toolbar button
32672 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32675 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32676 beginning of the currently selected text.
32677 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32678 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32679 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32680 scrolled so that it is visible.
32681 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32682 n, if any could be found.
32683 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32687 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32688 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32691 \begin_layout Standard
32692 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32695 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32699 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32700 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32701 LyX can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32702 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32705 \begin_inset space ~
32713 arg "dialog-show character"
32716 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32717 LyX automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32720 \begin_layout Standard
32721 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here:
32722 \begin_inset Newline newline
32726 \begin_inset Flex URL
32729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32731 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32737 \begin_inset Newline newline
32741 \begin_inset space ~
32744 files for each language.
32745 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32746 \begin_inset space ~
32749 files into LyX's installation subfolder
32758 \begin_inset Newline newline
32761 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32762 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32763 but in most cases these are
32779 is the language code.
32782 \begin_layout Subsection
32786 \begin_layout Standard
32789 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32790 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32792 \begin_inset space ~
32795 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32798 you can set the following things:
32801 \begin_layout Description
32803 \begin_inset space ~
32806 engine Select the library LyX should use for spell checking.
32807 Depending on your platform,
32821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32822 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32823 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32838 \begin_layout Description
32840 \begin_inset space ~
32843 language If this field is not empty, LyX will always use the given language
32844 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32847 \begin_layout Description
32849 \begin_inset space ~
32852 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32854 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32858 \begin_inset space \space{}
32862 This should normally not be needed.
32865 \begin_layout Description
32867 \begin_inset space ~
32871 \begin_inset space ~
32874 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32886 \begin_layout Description
32888 \begin_inset space ~
32891 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
32892 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32893 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32894 appear in a context menu.
32895 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32899 \begin_layout Description
32901 \begin_inset space ~
32905 \begin_inset space ~
32909 \begin_inset space ~
32912 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
32916 \begin_layout Section
32918 \begin_inset Index idx
32921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32928 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32930 name "sec:Thesaurus"
32937 \begin_layout Standard
32938 LyX provides a multilingual thesaurus.
32939 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
32948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32949 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32951 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
32960 thesaurus library, which is included in LyX).
32961 Therefore, LyX is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
32962 which are available for many languages.
32965 \begin_layout Standard
32966 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
32970 \begin_layout Subsection
32971 Setting up the thesaurus
32974 \begin_layout Standard
32983 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
32987 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
32992 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
32994 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32998 \begin_inset space ~
33006 For instance, the US English files are named:
33009 \begin_layout Itemize
33013 \begin_layout Itemize
33017 \begin_layout Standard
33026 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33027 and you just need to point LyX (in
33029 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33030 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33031 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33033 \begin_inset space ~
33038 ) to the path where they are installed.
33042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33043 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33044 ies, typical locations are
33050 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33054 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33058 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33061 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33067 LibreOffice-<Version>
33074 On the Mac, the default location is
33076 /Users\SpecialChar \slash{}
33077 <user name>\SpecialChar \slash{}
33078 Library\SpecialChar \slash{}
33079 Application Support\SpecialChar \slash{}
33080 libreoffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
33081 <version>\SpecialChar \slash{}
33089 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33090 during the LyX installation process, which will then be installed in the
33091 correct place right away.
33094 \begin_layout Standard
33095 If you want to install new\SpecialChar \slash{}
33096 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33100 \begin_layout Itemize
33101 \begin_inset Flex URL
33104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33106 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33114 \begin_layout Standard
33115 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33116 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33118 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33119 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33120 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33122 \begin_inset space ~
33128 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33129 and point LyX there.
33132 \begin_layout Standard
33133 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33135 LibreOffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
33138 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33144 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33147 If you do this, make sure that LyX is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33149 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33155 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33156 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33157 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33159 \begin_inset space ~
33164 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33167 \begin_layout Subsection
33168 Using the thesaurus
33171 \begin_layout Standard
33172 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33174 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33177 or the toolbar button
33180 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33183 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33185 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33187 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33188 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33189 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33198 ), related terms (such as
33201 \begin_inset space ~
33210 ), compounds (such as
33213 \begin_inset space ~
33222 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33231 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33234 \begin_layout Standard
33235 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33236 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33240 \begin_layout Standard
33241 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33242 the dictionary, such as the above
33246 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33247 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33251 \begin_inset space \space{}
33254 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33255 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33256 For example, looking up the word form
33260 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33265 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33266 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33270 \begin_inset space \space{}
33281 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33282 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33283 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33286 \begin_layout Section
33288 \begin_inset Index idx
33291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33298 \begin_inset Index idx
33301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33302 Document ! Change Tracking
33308 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33310 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33317 \begin_layout Standard
33318 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33319 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33320 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33321 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33323 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33325 \begin_inset space ~
33328 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33330 \begin_inset space ~
33338 \begin_layout Standard
33339 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33353 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33354 You can change the color in
33356 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33357 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33359 \begin_inset space ~
33363 \begin_inset space ~
33368 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
33374 \begin_inset Index idx
33377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33378 Color ! Change tracking
33383 The author and the date of the change are shown in LyX's status bar when
33384 the cursor is in changed text.
33385 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33388 arg "changes-merge"
33394 \begin_layout Standard
33395 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in LyX:
33396 \begin_inset Index idx
33399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33408 \begin_layout Standard
33409 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33415 \begin_layout Standard
33416 \begin_inset Graphics
33417 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33425 \begin_layout Standard
33426 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33432 \begin_layout Standard
33433 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33436 \begin_layout Standard
33437 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33443 \begin_layout Standard
33444 \begin_inset Tabular
33445 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33446 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33447 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33448 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33449 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33458 arg "changes-track"
33466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33472 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33474 \begin_inset space ~
33477 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33479 \begin_inset space ~
33488 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33497 arg "changes-output"
33505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33511 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33513 \begin_inset space ~
33516 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33518 \begin_inset space ~
33522 \begin_inset space ~
33526 \begin_inset space ~
33535 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33556 Jumps to the next change
33562 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33571 arg "change-accept"
33579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33585 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33587 \begin_inset space ~
33590 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33592 \begin_inset space ~
33601 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33610 arg "change-reject"
33618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33624 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33626 \begin_inset space ~
33629 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33631 \begin_inset space ~
33640 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33649 arg "changes-merge"
33657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33663 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33665 \begin_inset space ~
33668 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33670 \begin_inset space ~
33679 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33688 arg "all-changes-accept"
33696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33702 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33704 \begin_inset space ~
33707 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33709 \begin_inset space ~
33713 \begin_inset space ~
33722 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33731 arg "all-changes-reject"
33739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33745 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33747 \begin_inset space ~
33750 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33752 \begin_inset space ~
33756 \begin_inset space ~
33765 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33788 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33789 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33802 \begin_inset space ~
33811 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33834 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33836 \begin_inset space ~
33852 \begin_layout Standard
33853 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33859 \begin_layout Standard
33860 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33880 \begin_layout Standard
33881 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33882 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33883 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33884 the next change after the current cursor position.
33885 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33886 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
33887 step to the next change.
33888 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
33891 \begin_layout Standard
33892 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
33893 to describe a change.
33896 \begin_layout Standard
33897 To show the changes made in the output you need the LaTeX package
33902 \begin_inset Index idx
33905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33906 LaTeX-packages ! dvipost
33912 You will find it in the TeX Catalogue,
33913 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33919 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
33922 \begin_layout Section
33923 Comparison of Documents
33924 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33926 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
33931 \begin_inset Index idx
33934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33935 Comparison of documents
33943 \begin_layout Standard
33944 You can compare two different LyX files via the menu
33946 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33950 The comparison result is a LyX file with change tracking enabled showing
33952 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document LyX should
33953 take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
33957 \begin_inset space ~
33961 \begin_inset space ~
33965 \begin_inset space ~
33974 \begin_inset space ~
33978 \begin_inset space ~
33982 \begin_inset space ~
33986 \begin_inset space ~
33990 \begin_inset space ~
33994 \begin_inset space ~
33999 enables the change tracking option
34002 \begin_inset space ~
34006 \begin_inset space ~
34010 \begin_inset space ~
34015 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34018 \begin_layout Section
34019 International Support
34020 \begin_inset Index idx
34023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34024 International support
34032 \begin_layout Standard
34033 This section describes how to use LyX with any language you want.
34034 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34035 up LyX to use them:
34036 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34038 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34045 \begin_layout Standard
34046 Besides languages, LyX also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34047 \begin_inset space ~
34051 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34053 reference "sub:Special-Character"
34060 \begin_layout Subsection
34062 \begin_inset Index idx
34065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34072 \begin_inset Index idx
34075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34076 Document ! Settings
34082 \begin_inset Index idx
34085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34086 Document ! Language
34094 \begin_layout Standard
34097 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34098 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34101 dialog lets you set
34103 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34108 \begin_layout Standard
34113 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for LaTeX export.
34117 \begin_inset space ~
34122 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34123 For details about the different encoding options see section
34124 \begin_inset space ~
34128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34130 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34137 \begin_layout Subsection
34138 Keyboard mapping configuration
34139 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34141 name "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
34148 \begin_layout Standard
34149 If you have for example a U.
34150 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34153 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34154 can use an alternate keymap.
34155 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure LyX to
34156 use an Italian keymap.
34159 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34160 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34161 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34164 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34165 \begin_inset space ~
34169 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34171 reference "sub:Keyboard-Map"
34176 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34177 which one you want to use.
34180 \begin_layout Standard
34181 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34182 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34183 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34184 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34187 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34188 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34189 one to support the characters you want.
34190 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34197 \begin_layout Chapter
34200 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34202 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34209 \begin_layout Standard
34210 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34211 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34212 topic inside the user's guide.
34215 \begin_layout Section
34217 \begin_inset Index idx
34220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34229 \begin_layout Standard
34234 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34237 \begin_layout Subsection
34241 \begin_layout Standard
34242 Creates a new document.
34245 \begin_layout Subsection
34249 \begin_layout Standard
34250 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34251 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34252 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34255 \begin_layout Subsection
34259 \begin_layout Standard
34263 \begin_layout Subsection
34267 \begin_layout Standard
34268 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34269 Click there on a file to open it.
34272 \begin_layout Subsection
34276 \begin_layout Standard
34277 Closes the current document.
34280 \begin_layout Subsection
34284 \begin_layout Standard
34285 Closes all opened documents.
34288 \begin_layout Subsection
34292 \begin_layout Standard
34293 Saves the actual document.
34296 \begin_layout Subsection
34300 \begin_layout Standard
34301 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34304 \begin_layout Subsection
34308 \begin_layout Standard
34309 Saves all opened documents.
34312 \begin_layout Subsection
34316 \begin_layout Standard
34317 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34320 \begin_layout Subsection
34324 \begin_layout Standard
34325 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34326 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34327 It is described in the section
34329 Version Control in LyX
34333 Additional Features
34338 \begin_layout Subsection
34342 \begin_layout Standard
34343 Here you can import files from older LyX-versions, HTML-files, LaTeX-files,
34344 NoWeb-files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files
34346 The files will be imported as a new LyX-document.
34349 \begin_layout Standard
34350 When using the menu entry
34353 \begin_inset space ~
34358 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34362 \begin_inset space ~
34366 \begin_inset space ~
34370 \begin_inset space ~
34375 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34376 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34379 \begin_layout Subsection
34381 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34390 \begin_layout Standard
34391 You can export your document to various file formats.
34392 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your LyX-file.
34393 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34394 They depend on the programs found by LyX during its configuration.
34397 \begin_layout Standard
34398 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34400 \begin_inset space ~
34404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34406 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
34413 \begin_layout Description
34419 \begin_inset space ~
34426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34433 yX format of the special LyX
34434 \begin_inset space ~
34437 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34438 \begin_inset Newline newline
34441 Since LyX 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into LyX.
34444 \begin_layout Description
34445 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34451 \begin_layout Description
34453 \begin_inset space ~
34456 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34462 \begin_layout Description
34463 DraftDVI LaTeX's native DVI-format.
34464 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34465 files paths or file names in your document.
34466 LyX use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34473 \begin_layout Description
34474 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34475 in files paths or file names
34478 \begin_layout Description
34480 \begin_inset space ~
34487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34494 eX) DVI-format using the program
34498 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-TeX fonts;
34501 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34509 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34517 \begin_layout Description
34519 \begin_inset space ~
34522 (cropped) the same as
34526 but with cropped page margins.
34529 \begin_layout Description
34531 \begin_inset space ~
34534 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34538 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34543 \begin_layout Description
34544 HTML HTML-format (the HTML-converter is a third-party product and may not
34548 \begin_layout Description
34550 \begin_inset space ~
34554 \begin_inset space ~
34557 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34561 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34569 \begin_layout Description
34576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34584 \begin_inset space ~
34595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34608 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34613 \begin_layout Description
34620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34628 \begin_inset space ~
34633 text file with the LaTeX source, additionally all images used in the document
34634 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34638 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34641 \begin_layout Description
34648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34656 \begin_inset space ~
34661 text file with the LaTeX source code, additionally all images used in the
34662 document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable
34670 \begin_layout Description
34677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34685 \begin_inset space ~
34696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34709 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34714 \begin_layout Description
34716 \begin_inset space ~
34720 \begin_inset space ~
34729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34738 TeX) text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the syntax of the
34739 music notation software
34744 \begin_layout Description
34751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34761 \begin_inset space ~
34764 z.y.x LyX-Document in a format readable by the LyX versions z.y.x (e.
34765 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34769 \begin_inset space \space{}
34773 \begin_inset space ~
34777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34792 represent the version number)
34795 \begin_layout Description
34802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34812 \begin_inset space ~
34816 \begin_inset space ~
34819 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34820 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34821 to compile it (images, child documents, BibTeX files, etc.)
34824 \begin_layout Description
34831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34840 yXHTML HTML-format using LyX's internal XHTML engine
34843 \begin_layout Description
34844 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34849 \begin_layout Description
34850 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34852 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34855 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34859 \begin_layout Description
34861 \begin_inset space ~
34864 (cropped) the same as
34867 \begin_inset space ~
34872 but with cropped page margins
34875 \begin_layout Description
34879 \begin_inset space ~
34884 PDF-format using the program
34888 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34891 \begin_layout Description
34895 \begin_inset space ~
34899 \begin_inset space ~
34907 \begin_inset space ~
34912 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
34913 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34917 \begin_inset space \space{}
34920 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
34924 \begin_layout Description
34928 \begin_inset space ~
34935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34944 PDF-format using the program
34948 , produces PDF-files directly
34951 \begin_layout Description
34955 \begin_inset space ~
34960 PDF-format using the program
34964 , produces PDF-files directly
34967 \begin_layout Description
34971 \begin_inset space ~
34976 PDF-format using the program
34980 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34983 \begin_layout Description
34987 \begin_inset space ~
34994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35003 PDF-format using the program
35007 , produces PDF-files directly
35010 \begin_layout Description
35014 \begin_inset space ~
35022 \begin_layout Description
35026 \begin_inset space ~
35030 \begin_inset space ~
35035 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
35036 and then exported as text using the program
35041 \begin_layout Description
35046 PostScript format using the program
35051 \begin_layout Description
35052 Sweave text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the statistical
35053 programming language
35066 it is possible to use
35073 \begin_layout Standard
35074 If one of the menu entries
35081 \begin_inset space ~
35090 is missing, you need to update your LaTeX installation.
35091 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
35092 \begin_inset space ~
35096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35098 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35103 \begin_inset Index idx
35106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35107 Reconfiguration of LyX
35115 \begin_layout Subsection
35119 \begin_layout Standard
35120 With this menu entry you can print your document to a file in PostScript
35121 format or send it to a printer.
35122 The printer will also use the document in PostScript format.
35123 The conversion to PostScript is done in the background by LyX using the
35129 For more information have a look at section
35130 \begin_inset space ~
35134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35136 reference "sub:Printing-the-File"
35143 \begin_layout Subsection
35147 \begin_layout Standard
35148 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35149 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to LyX's PATH
35150 prefix, see section
35151 \begin_inset space ~
35155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35157 reference "sec:Paths"
35162 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35171 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35172 The format can be changed in LyX's preferences as described in section
35173 \begin_inset space ~
35177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35179 reference "sub:Converters"
35186 \begin_layout Subsection
35187 New and Close Window
35190 \begin_layout Standard
35191 Opens or closes a new instance of LyX.
35194 \begin_layout Subsection
35198 \begin_layout Standard
35199 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35202 \begin_layout Section
35204 \begin_inset Index idx
35207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35216 \begin_layout Subsection
35220 \begin_layout Standard
35221 Described in section
35222 \begin_inset space ~
35226 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35228 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35235 \begin_layout Subsection
35236 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35239 \begin_layout Standard
35240 Described in section
35241 \begin_inset space ~
35245 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35247 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35254 \begin_layout Subsection
35258 \begin_layout Standard
35259 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35260 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35263 \begin_layout Subsection
35267 \begin_layout Standard
35268 Selects the whole document.
35271 \begin_layout Subsection
35272 Find & Replace (Quick)
35275 \begin_layout Standard
35276 Described in section
35277 \begin_inset space ~
35281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35283 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35290 \begin_layout Subsection
35291 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35294 \begin_layout Standard
35295 Described in section
35296 \begin_inset space ~
35300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35302 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35309 \begin_layout Subsection
35310 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35313 \begin_layout Standard
35314 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35318 \begin_layout Subsection
35322 \begin_layout Standard
35323 Described in section
35324 \begin_inset space ~
35328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35330 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35337 \begin_layout Subsection
35339 \begin_inset Index idx
35342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35343 Paragraph ! Settings
35351 \begin_layout Standard
35352 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35353 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35357 \begin_layout Standard
35358 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35359 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35365 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35366 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35368 \begin_inset space ~
35376 \begin_layout Subsection
35380 \begin_layout Standard
35381 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
35382 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35383 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
35387 \begin_layout Standard
35388 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
35390 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
35391 The properties of tables are described in section
35392 \begin_inset space ~
35396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35398 reference "sec:Tables"
35402 , the properties of formulas in chapter
35403 \begin_inset space ~
35407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35409 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35416 \begin_layout Subsection
35417 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35420 \begin_layout Standard
35421 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35423 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35424 \begin_inset space ~
35428 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35430 reference "sec:Nesting"
35435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35437 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
35444 \begin_layout Subsection
35447 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35450 \begin_layout Standard
35451 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35452 nts of the same type.
35454 \begin_inset space ~
35458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35460 reference "sub:Separate-Nestings"
35464 for an explanation.
35467 \begin_layout Section
35469 \begin_inset Index idx
35472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35481 \begin_layout Standard
35482 At the bottom of the
35486 menu the opened documents are listed.
35489 \begin_layout Subsection
35490 Open/Close all Insets
35493 \begin_layout Standard
35494 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35497 \begin_layout Subsection
35498 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35501 \begin_layout Standard
35502 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35505 \begin_layout Standard
35506 Math macros are described in the
35513 \begin_layout Subsection
35517 \begin_layout Standard
35518 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35519 \begin_inset space ~
35523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35525 reference "sec:Navigating"
35530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35532 reference "sub:Table-of-Contents"
35539 \begin_layout Subsection
35543 \begin_layout Standard
35544 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35546 \begin_inset space ~
35550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35552 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35559 \begin_layout Subsection
35563 \begin_layout Standard
35564 Opens a window showing console messages.
35565 This is useful for debugging LyX (i.
35566 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35569 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35570 while LaTeX is processing the document.
35573 \begin_layout Subsection
35575 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35577 name "sub:Toolbars"
35582 \begin_inset Index idx
35585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35594 \begin_layout Standard
35595 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35596 All toolbars and the
35599 \begin_inset space ~
35604 can be turned on and off.
35609 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35621 \begin_inset space ~
35633 \begin_inset space ~
35638 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35642 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35649 \begin_layout Standard
35654 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35658 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35659 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35660 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35661 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35662 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35665 \begin_layout Standard
35666 LyX's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35667 \begin_inset space ~
35671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35673 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35680 \begin_layout Subsection
35684 \begin_layout Standard
35688 \begin_inset space ~
35692 \begin_inset space ~
35696 \begin_inset space ~
35700 \begin_inset space ~
35704 \begin_inset space ~
35708 \begin_inset space ~
35713 will split LyX's main window vertically while
35716 \begin_inset space ~
35720 \begin_inset space ~
35724 \begin_inset space ~
35728 \begin_inset space ~
35732 \begin_inset space ~
35736 \begin_inset space ~
35741 will split it horizontally.
35742 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35743 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35744 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35745 three or more documents at the same time.
35746 To close a split view, use the menu
35749 \begin_inset space ~
35753 \begin_inset space ~
35761 \begin_layout Subsection
35765 \begin_layout Standard
35766 Closes a split view.
35769 \begin_layout Subsection
35773 \begin_layout Standard
35774 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35775 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35776 It furthermore displays LyX's main window fullscreen.
35777 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35778 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35781 \begin_layout Section
35783 \begin_inset Index idx
35786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35795 \begin_layout Subsection
35799 \begin_layout Standard
35800 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35801 \begin_inset space ~
35805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35807 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35818 \begin_layout Subsection
35820 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35822 name "sub:Special-Character"
35829 \begin_layout Standard
35830 Here you can insert the following characters:
35833 \begin_layout Description
35838 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35840 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35841 the available characters depend on the LaTeX-packages you have installed.
35842 You can get a complete display by checking
35845 \begin_inset space ~
35851 \begin_inset Newline newline
35855 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35863 Not all characters will be visible in the
35867 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35869 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35875 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
35879 ) can display every character.
35887 \begin_layout Description
35888 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar \ldots{}
35892 \begin_layout Description
35894 \begin_inset space ~
35898 \begin_inset space ~
35901 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35902 \begin_inset space ~
35906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35908 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
35915 \begin_layout Description
35917 \begin_inset space ~
35920 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35923 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35924 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35930 \begin_layout Description
35932 \begin_inset space ~
35935 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35938 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35939 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35945 \begin_layout Description
35947 \begin_inset space ~
35950 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar \nobreakdash-
35954 \begin_layout Description
35956 \begin_inset space ~
35959 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar \slash{}
35963 \begin_layout Description
35965 \begin_inset space ~
35968 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
35974 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35980 \begin_layout Description
35982 \begin_inset space ~
35985 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar \menuseparator
35989 \begin_layout Description
35991 \begin_inset space ~
35995 \begin_inset Index idx
35998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36005 \begin_inset Index idx
36008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36009 Language ! Phonetic symbols
36014 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
36015 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
36017 To use this feature you must have the LaTeX-package
36022 \begin_inset Index idx
36025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36026 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
36032 \begin_inset Newline newline
36035 More information about this feature can be found in the
36041 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36047 \begin_layout Subsection
36051 \begin_layout Standard
36052 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36055 \begin_layout Description
36056 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36057 \begin_inset script superscript
36059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36068 \begin_layout Description
36069 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36070 \begin_inset script subscript
36072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36081 \begin_layout Description
36083 \begin_inset space ~
36086 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36087 \begin_inset space ~
36091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36093 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
36100 \begin_layout Description
36102 \begin_inset space ~
36105 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36106 \begin_inset space ~
36110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36112 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
36119 \begin_layout Description
36121 \begin_inset space ~
36124 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36125 \begin_inset space ~
36129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36131 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
36138 \begin_layout Description
36140 \begin_inset space ~
36143 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36145 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36149 \begin_inset space \space{}
36152 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36153 An example from the LyX
36158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36161 To insert a fraction use the command
36166 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36170 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36179 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36186 \begin_layout Description
36188 \begin_inset space ~
36191 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36192 \begin_inset space ~
36196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36198 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
36205 \begin_layout Description
36207 \begin_inset space ~
36210 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36211 \begin_inset space ~
36215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36217 reference "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
36224 \begin_layout Description
36226 \begin_inset space ~
36229 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36230 \begin_inset space ~
36234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36236 reference "sub:Vertical-Space"
36243 \begin_layout Description
36244 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36245 \begin_inset space ~
36249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36251 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
36258 \begin_layout Description
36260 \begin_inset space ~
36263 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36264 \begin_inset space ~
36268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36270 reference "sub:Hyphenation"
36277 \begin_layout Description
36279 \begin_inset space ~
36282 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36283 \begin_inset space ~
36287 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36289 reference "sub:Ligatures"
36296 \begin_layout Description
36298 \begin_inset space ~
36302 \begin_inset space ~
36305 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36306 \begin_inset space ~
36310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36312 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36319 \begin_layout Description
36321 \begin_inset space ~
36324 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36325 as described in section
36326 \begin_inset space ~
36330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36332 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36339 \begin_layout Description
36341 \begin_inset space ~
36344 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36345 \begin_inset space ~
36349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36351 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36358 \begin_layout Description
36360 \begin_inset space ~
36363 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36364 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36366 \begin_inset space ~
36370 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36372 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36379 \begin_layout Description
36381 \begin_inset space ~
36384 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36385 \begin_inset space ~
36389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36391 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36398 \begin_layout Description
36400 \begin_inset space ~
36404 \begin_inset space ~
36407 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36408 \begin_inset space ~
36412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36414 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36421 \begin_layout Subsection
36425 \begin_layout Standard
36426 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36430 \begin_inset space ~
36451 are described in section
36452 \begin_inset space ~
36456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36458 reference "sec:toc"
36467 is described in section
36468 \begin_inset space ~
36472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36474 reference "sec:Index"
36482 is described in section
36483 \begin_inset space ~
36487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36489 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36495 BibTeX Bibliography
36497 is described in section
36498 \begin_inset space ~
36502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36504 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
36511 \begin_layout Subsection
36515 \begin_layout Standard
36516 To insert floats, as described in section
36517 \begin_inset space ~
36521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36523 reference "sec:Floats"
36527 and in detail the chapter
36534 \begin_inset space ~
36542 \begin_layout Subsection
36546 \begin_layout Standard
36547 To insert notes, described in section
36548 \begin_inset space ~
36552 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36554 reference "sec:Notes"
36561 \begin_layout Subsection
36565 \begin_layout Standard
36566 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36568 Branches are described in section
36569 \begin_inset space ~
36573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36575 reference "sec:Branches"
36582 \begin_layout Subsection
36586 \begin_layout Standard
36587 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36588 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36590 An example is the document class
36591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36598 with three custom insets.
36601 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36605 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36611 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36614 \begin_layout Subsection
36616 \begin_inset Index idx
36619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36628 \begin_layout Standard
36629 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36631 For more information see chapter
36633 External Document Parts
36636 \begin_inset space ~
36642 \begin_layout Subsection
36644 \begin_inset Index idx
36647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36656 \begin_layout Standard
36657 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36658 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36665 \begin_inset space ~
36673 \begin_layout Subsection
36677 \begin_layout Standard
36682 dialog as described in section
36683 \begin_inset space ~
36687 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36689 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36696 \begin_layout Subsection
36700 \begin_layout Standard
36705 as described in section
36706 \begin_inset space ~
36710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36712 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36719 \begin_layout Subsection
36723 \begin_layout Standard
36728 as described in section
36729 \begin_inset space ~
36733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36735 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36742 \begin_layout Subsection
36744 \begin_inset Index idx
36747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36754 \begin_inset Index idx
36757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36758 Longtables ! Caption
36766 \begin_layout Standard
36767 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36768 Floats are described in section
36769 \begin_inset space ~
36773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36775 reference "sec:Floats"
36779 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36786 \begin_inset space ~
36794 \begin_layout Subsection
36798 \begin_layout Standard
36799 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36800 \begin_inset space ~
36804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36806 reference "sec:Index"
36813 \begin_layout Subsection
36817 \begin_layout Standard
36818 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36819 \begin_inset space ~
36823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36825 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36832 \begin_layout Subsection
36836 \begin_layout Standard
36837 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36838 Tables are described in section
36839 \begin_inset space ~
36843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36845 reference "sec:Tables"
36849 and in detail in the chapter
36856 \begin_inset space ~
36864 \begin_layout Subsection
36868 \begin_layout Standard
36874 Graphics are described in section
36875 \begin_inset space ~
36879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36881 reference "sec:Graphics"
36888 \begin_layout Subsection
36892 \begin_layout Standard
36893 Inserts a URL as described in section
36894 \begin_inset space ~
36898 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36900 reference "sub:URLs"
36907 \begin_layout Subsection
36911 \begin_layout Standard
36912 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36913 \begin_inset space ~
36917 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36919 reference "sub:Hyperlinks"
36926 \begin_layout Subsection
36930 \begin_layout Standard
36931 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36932 \begin_inset space ~
36936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36938 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36945 \begin_layout Subsection
36949 \begin_layout Standard
36950 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36951 \begin_inset space ~
36955 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36957 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36964 \begin_layout Subsection
36968 \begin_layout Standard
36969 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
36970 title or caption of a float.
36971 Inserts a short title as described in section
36972 \begin_inset space ~
36976 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36978 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36985 \begin_layout Subsection
36989 \begin_layout Standard
36990 Inserts a TeX Code box as described in section
36991 \begin_inset space ~
36995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36997 reference "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
37004 \begin_layout Subsection
37006 \begin_inset Index idx
37009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37018 \begin_layout Standard
37019 Inserts a program listings box.
37020 Program listings are explained in the chapter
37022 Program Code Listings
37027 \begin_inset space ~
37035 \begin_layout Subsection
37039 \begin_layout Standard
37040 Inserts the actual date.
37041 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
37043 LyX offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37051 \begin_inset space ~
37059 \begin_layout Subsection
37063 \begin_layout Standard
37064 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37065 \begin_inset space ~
37069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37071 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37078 \begin_layout Section
37080 \begin_inset Index idx
37083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37092 \begin_layout Standard
37093 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37094 \begin_inset space ~
37097 of the current document.
37098 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37101 \begin_layout Subsection
37105 \begin_layout Standard
37106 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37107 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37108 to jump, for example, between section
37109 \begin_inset space ~
37113 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37114 \begin_inset space ~
37117 2.5 and use the submenu
37120 \begin_inset space ~
37124 \begin_inset space ~
37131 \begin_inset space ~
37137 \begin_inset space ~
37141 \begin_inset space ~
37147 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37151 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37157 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37160 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37163 \begin_layout Standard
37164 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37168 \begin_inset space ~
37173 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37176 \begin_inset space ~
37181 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37184 \begin_layout Subsection
37185 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37188 \begin_layout Standard
37189 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37193 \begin_layout Subsection
37197 \begin_layout Standard
37198 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37199 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37200 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37204 \begin_inset space ~
37208 \begin_inset space ~
37216 \begin_layout Subsection
37220 \begin_layout Standard
37221 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37224 The LyX Server\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37226 \begin_inset space ~
37234 \begin_inset space ~
37239 manual for a detailed description.
37242 \begin_layout Section
37244 \begin_inset Index idx
37247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37256 \begin_layout Subsection
37260 \begin_layout Standard
37261 Change Tracking is described in section
37262 \begin_inset space ~
37266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37268 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37275 \begin_layout Subsection
37280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37290 \begin_layout Standard
37291 After running LaTeX by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be
37293 It shows the logfile of the LaTeX-program used.
37294 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37295 to the clipboard or update the view.
37296 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for LaTeX-errors.
37299 \begin_layout Subsection
37300 Start Appendix Here
37303 \begin_layout Standard
37304 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37305 as described in section
37306 \begin_inset space ~
37310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37312 reference "sec:Appendices"
37319 \begin_layout Subsection
37321 \begin_inset space ~
37327 \begin_layout Standard
37328 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37329 default output format for the document (menu
37331 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37332 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37333 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37335 \begin_inset space ~
37339 \begin_inset space ~
37345 \begin_inset space ~
37349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37351 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37355 ) or in the LyX preferences (menu
37357 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37358 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37360 \begin_inset space ~
37363 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37365 \begin_inset space ~
37368 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37370 \begin_inset space ~
37374 \begin_inset space ~
37380 \begin_inset space ~
37384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37386 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37390 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37391 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37393 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37394 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37396 \begin_inset space ~
37399 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37401 \begin_inset space ~
37404 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37408 \begin_inset space ~
37412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37414 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37419 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
37420 The default output format is
37423 \begin_inset space ~
37431 \begin_layout Subsection
37432 View (Other Formats)
37435 \begin_layout Standard
37436 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37437 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37438 actual document with an external program.
37439 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37440 the LaTeX programs that are found when LyX was configured.
37441 All possible formats are listed in section
37442 \begin_inset space ~
37446 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37448 reference "sub:Export"
37453 You should at least see the menu entry
37458 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your LaTeX installation.
37459 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX (see section
37460 \begin_inset space ~
37464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37466 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37471 \begin_inset Index idx
37474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37475 Reconfiguration of LyX
37483 \begin_layout Standard
37484 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37485 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37487 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37488 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37490 \begin_inset space ~
37493 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37495 \begin_inset space ~
37498 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37502 \begin_inset space ~
37506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37508 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37513 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
37516 \begin_layout Subsection
37518 \begin_inset space ~
37524 \begin_layout Standard
37525 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37526 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37529 \begin_layout Subsection
37530 Update (Other Formats)
37533 \begin_layout Standard
37534 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37535 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37538 \begin_layout Subsection
37539 View Master Document
37542 \begin_layout Standard
37543 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37559 \begin_inset space ~
37564 manual for more information on this topic).
37565 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37566 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37570 \begin_inset space ~
37574 \begin_inset space ~
37579 generates the output of the whole book, while
37583 will just output the chapter alone.
37586 \begin_layout Standard
37587 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37588 in the document settings (menu
37590 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37591 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37592 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37594 \begin_inset space ~
37598 \begin_inset space ~
37604 \begin_inset space ~
37608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37610 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37614 ) or in the preferences (menu
37616 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37617 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37619 \begin_inset space ~
37622 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37624 \begin_inset space ~
37627 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37629 \begin_inset space ~
37633 \begin_inset space ~
37639 \begin_inset space ~
37643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37645 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37652 \begin_layout Subsection
37653 Update Master Document
37656 \begin_layout Standard
37657 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37673 \begin_inset space ~
37678 manual for more information on this topic).
37679 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37680 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37683 \begin_layout Standard
37684 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37685 in the document settings (menu
37687 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37688 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37689 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37691 \begin_inset space ~
37695 \begin_inset space ~
37701 \begin_inset space ~
37705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37707 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37711 ) or in the preferences (menu
37713 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37714 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37716 \begin_inset space ~
37719 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37721 \begin_inset space ~
37724 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37726 \begin_inset space ~
37730 \begin_inset space ~
37736 \begin_inset space ~
37740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37742 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37749 \begin_layout Subsection
37753 \begin_layout Standard
37754 Un/compresses the current document.
37757 \begin_layout Subsection
37761 \begin_layout Standard
37762 The document settings are described in appendix
37763 \begin_inset space ~
37767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37769 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37776 \begin_layout Section
37778 \begin_inset Index idx
37781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37790 \begin_layout Subsection
37794 \begin_layout Standard
37795 Spell checking is explained in section
37796 \begin_inset space ~
37800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37802 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37809 \begin_layout Subsection
37813 \begin_layout Standard
37814 The thesaurus is described in section
37815 \begin_inset space ~
37819 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37821 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37828 \begin_layout Subsection
37830 \begin_inset Index idx
37833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37840 \begin_inset Index idx
37843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37852 \begin_layout Standard
37853 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37854 the highlighted document part.
37857 \begin_layout Subsection
37862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37870 \begin_inset Index idx
37873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37882 \begin_layout Standard
37883 Generates with the help of the program
37887 a log of possible LaTeX-errors and displays it in a dialog.
37888 This feature is not available on Windows.
37891 \begin_layout Subsection
37896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37904 \begin_inset Index idx
37907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37916 \begin_layout Standard
37917 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your LaTeX-syst
37922 \begin_inset space ~
37927 to see the full filename paths.
37930 \begin_layout Subsection
37932 \begin_inset Index idx
37935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37944 \begin_layout Standard
37945 Opens a dialog to compare LyX files as described in section
37946 \begin_inset space ~
37950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37952 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37959 \begin_layout Subsection
37961 \begin_inset Index idx
37964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37965 LyX ! Reconfigure|see
37969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37976 Reconfiguration of LyX
37980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37993 \begin_inset Index idx
37996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37997 Reconfiguration of LyX
38005 \begin_layout Standard
38006 Reconfigures LyX; that is, LyX looks for LaTeX-packages and programs it
38007 needs; see also section
38008 \begin_inset space ~
38012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38014 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38021 \begin_layout Subsection
38025 \begin_layout Standard
38030 dialog as described in detail in appendix
38031 \begin_inset space ~
38035 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38037 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
38044 \begin_layout Section
38046 \begin_inset Index idx
38049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38058 \begin_layout Standard
38059 This menu lists the documentation files of LyX in the language of LyX's
38061 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38065 \begin_layout Standard
38069 \begin_inset space ~
38074 shows a LyX-document with information about the LaTeX-packages and classes
38075 found by LyX (see also section
38076 \begin_inset space ~
38080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38082 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38089 \begin_layout Standard
38093 \begin_inset space ~
38100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38109 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the LyX version
38113 \begin_layout Section
38115 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38117 name "sec:Toolbars"
38124 \begin_layout Standard
38125 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38126 \begin_inset space ~
38130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38132 reference "sub:Toolbars"
38139 \begin_layout Standard
38140 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38141 This is described in the
38143 Additional Features
38148 \begin_layout Subsection
38150 \begin_inset Index idx
38153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38162 \begin_layout Standard
38163 \begin_inset Graphics
38164 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38172 \begin_layout Standard
38173 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38179 \begin_layout Standard
38180 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38197 \begin_inset Note Note
38200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38201 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38206 manual for more information.
38214 \begin_layout Standard
38215 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38221 \begin_layout Standard
38222 \begin_inset Tabular
38223 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38224 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38225 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38226 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38232 \begin_inset Graphics
38233 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38247 pull-down box for the environments
38260 \begin_layout Standard
38261 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38267 \begin_layout Standard
38269 \begin_inset Tabular
38270 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38271 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38272 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38273 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38274 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38297 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38304 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38327 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38334 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38357 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38364 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38373 arg "dialog-show print"
38381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38387 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38394 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38403 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38417 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38424 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38447 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38454 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38477 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38484 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38507 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38514 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38537 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38544 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38567 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38574 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38583 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38597 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38599 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38603 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38607 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38616 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38623 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38637 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38639 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38643 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38647 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38656 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38665 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38679 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38680 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38687 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38708 Emphasize text, function of the
38710 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38712 \begin_inset space ~
38715 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38724 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38745 Set text to noun style, function of the
38747 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38749 \begin_inset space ~
38752 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38761 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38770 arg "textstyle-apply"
38778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38782 Format text using the current settings in the
38784 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38786 \begin_inset space ~
38789 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38798 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38821 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38822 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38824 \begin_inset space ~
38833 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38842 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38856 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38863 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38870 arg "tabular-insert"
38878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38884 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38891 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38900 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38912 Toggle outline window on/off,
38914 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38921 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38930 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38942 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38948 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38957 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38969 Toggle table toolbar on/off
38982 \begin_layout Subsection
38984 \begin_inset Index idx
38987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38996 \begin_layout Standard
38997 \begin_inset Graphics
38998 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
39006 \begin_layout Standard
39007 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39013 \begin_layout Standard
39014 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39018 \begin_layout Standard
39019 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39025 \begin_layout Standard
39026 \begin_inset Tabular
39027 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
39028 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39029 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39030 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39031 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39058 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39067 arg "layout Enumerate"
39075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39085 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39094 arg "layout Itemize"
39102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39112 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39139 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39148 arg "layout Description"
39156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39166 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39175 arg "depth-increment"
39183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39189 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39191 \begin_inset space ~
39195 \begin_inset space ~
39204 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39213 arg "depth-decrement"
39221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39227 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39229 \begin_inset space ~
39233 \begin_inset space ~
39242 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39251 arg "float-insert figure"
39259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39265 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39266 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39273 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39282 arg "float-insert table"
39290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39296 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39297 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39304 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39327 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39334 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39343 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39357 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39364 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39373 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39387 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39394 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39417 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39419 \begin_inset space ~
39428 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39437 arg "nomencl-insert"
39445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39451 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39453 \begin_inset space ~
39462 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39471 arg "footnote-insert"
39479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39485 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39492 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39501 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39515 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39517 \begin_inset space ~
39526 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39549 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39550 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39563 \begin_inset space ~
39572 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39581 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39595 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39602 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39625 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39632 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39655 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39672 \begin_inset space ~
39681 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39690 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39704 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39705 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39712 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39721 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39735 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39736 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39738 \begin_inset space ~
39747 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39756 arg "dialog-show character"
39764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39770 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39772 \begin_inset space ~
39775 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39782 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39791 arg "layout-paragraph"
39799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39805 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39807 \begin_inset space ~
39816 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39825 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39839 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39853 \begin_layout Subsection
39854 View/Update Toolbar
39855 \begin_inset Index idx
39858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39859 Toolbar ! View / Update
39867 \begin_layout Standard
39868 \begin_inset Graphics
39869 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39876 \begin_layout Standard
39877 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39883 \begin_layout Standard
39884 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39888 \begin_layout Standard
39889 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39895 \begin_layout Standard
39896 \begin_inset Tabular
39897 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39898 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39899 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39900 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39901 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39924 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39931 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39940 arg "buffer-update"
39948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39954 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39961 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39970 arg "master-buffer-view"
39978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39984 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39986 \begin_inset space ~
39995 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40004 arg "master-buffer-update"
40012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40018 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40020 \begin_inset space ~
40024 \begin_inset space ~
40033 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40042 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40056 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40057 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40058 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40059 Synchronize with Output
40065 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40070 \begin_inset Graphics
40071 filename ../images/view-others.png
40073 groupId toolbarbuttons
40084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40090 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40091 View (Other Formats)
40097 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40102 \begin_inset Graphics
40103 filename ../images/update-others.png
40105 groupId toolbarbuttons
40114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40120 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40121 Update (Other Formats)
40134 \begin_layout Standard
40135 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40139 \begin_layout Subsection
40143 \begin_layout Standard
40144 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40145 \begin_inset space ~
40149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40151 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40155 , the table toolbar
40156 \begin_inset Index idx
40159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40168 \begin_inset space ~
40173 manual and the math macro toolbar
40174 \begin_inset Index idx
40177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40190 \begin_layout Chapter
40191 The Document Settings
40192 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40194 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40199 \begin_inset Index idx
40202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40203 Document ! Settings
40211 \begin_layout Standard
40215 \begin_inset space ~
40220 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40221 is called with the menu
40223 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40227 You can save your document settings as default with the
40229 Save as Document Defaults
40231 button in any dialog.
40232 This will create a template named
40236 which is automatically loaded by LyX when you create a new document without
40240 \begin_layout Standard
40245 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40246 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40249 \begin_layout Standard
40250 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40251 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40252 to find the one you are looking for.
40253 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40254 the submenus of the dialog.
40256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40260 \begin_inset space \space{}
40264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40271 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40272 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40273 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40276 \begin_layout Section
40280 \begin_layout Standard
40281 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40283 Document classes are described in section
40284 \begin_inset space ~
40288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40290 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40298 \begin_layout Standard
40302 \begin_inset space ~
40307 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in LyX's
40311 folder and thus not recognized by LyX as a layout for a document class.
40312 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40314 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40323 \begin_layout Standard
40324 Some classes use special class options by default.
40325 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40329 and you can decide to use them or not.
40330 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40331 recommended you leave them untouched.
40336 is used for LaTeX's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40341 , the default driver for the LaTeX-packages is used.
40342 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40348 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40349 \begin_inset Newline newline
40354 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40357 \begin_inset Newline newline
40360 you first have to activate them in your LaTeX distribution, see section
40366 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40368 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40380 \begin_layout Standard
40385 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40386 The master document will be used by LyX in the background if the child
40387 document is opened without its master.
40388 This way child documents are always compilable.
40389 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40396 \begin_inset space ~
40404 \begin_layout Standard
40405 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the LaTeX-package
40415 \begin_inset Index idx
40418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40419 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
40425 \begin_inset Index idx
40428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40429 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
40434 for cross-references, see section
40435 \begin_inset space ~
40439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40441 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40448 \begin_layout Section
40452 \begin_layout Standard
40453 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40454 Please refer to the section
40457 \begin_inset space ~
40465 \begin_inset space ~
40470 manual for details.
40473 \begin_layout Section
40477 \begin_layout Standard
40478 Modules are explained in section
40479 \begin_inset space ~
40483 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40485 reference "sub:Modules"
40492 \begin_layout Section
40496 \begin_layout Standard
40498 \begin_inset space ~
40502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40504 reference "sub:Local-Layout"
40511 \begin_layout Section
40515 \begin_layout Standard
40516 The document font settings are described in section
40517 \begin_inset space ~
40521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40523 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40530 \begin_layout Section
40534 \begin_layout Standard
40535 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40547 \begin_inset space ~
40552 and whether it should be a
40555 \begin_inset space ~
40560 can also be specified here.
40563 \begin_layout Standard
40564 Note that LyX will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on
40566 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40568 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40571 \begin_layout Standard
40574 Use justification in LyX work area
40576 you can decide if LyX justifies the text on screen.
40577 This only affects the text inside LyX not in the output.
40580 \begin_layout Section
40584 \begin_layout Standard
40585 This dialog is described in sections
40586 \begin_inset space ~
40590 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40592 reference "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40599 reference "sub:Document-Layout"
40606 \begin_layout Section
40610 \begin_layout Standard
40611 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40612 \begin_inset space ~
40616 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40618 reference "sub:Margins"
40625 \begin_layout Section
40627 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40629 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40634 \begin_inset Index idx
40637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40638 Language ! Encoding
40646 \begin_layout Standard
40647 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40648 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to LaTeX (the
40649 LyX file is always encoded in utf8).
40650 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40651 be exported as LaTeX-commands (this can fail if a LaTeX-command is not
40652 known for a particular character).
40655 \begin_layout Standard
40656 If you use the option
40660 , LyX determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40661 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40662 than one encoding in the LaTeX file.
40663 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40664 exactly one encoding.
40665 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40668 \begin_layout Standard
40669 LyX also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40670 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40671 If you want to use this (and your LaTeX installation supports Unicode),
40672 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40673 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard LaTeX is quite incomplete,
40674 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40679 (when LyX uses its list of known LaTeX-commands), but does not work with
40680 a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known LaTeX-commands is not used,
40681 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40682 The situation is much better with XeTeX and LuaTeX, two new alternative
40683 engines to standard LaTeX.
40684 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40685 LyX now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40688 \begin_inset space ~
40695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40707 \begin_inset space ~
40714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40726 \begin_inset space ~
40732 \begin_inset space ~
40736 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40738 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
40743 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40747 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40750 \begin_layout Standard
40754 \begin_inset space ~
40759 determines the LaTeX-package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40769 The possible settings are:
40772 \begin_layout Description
40773 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40775 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40776 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40780 \begin_inset space ~
40784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40786 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
40793 \begin_layout Description
40794 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40795 format you will use.
40796 In many cases this will be
40801 \begin_inset Index idx
40804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40805 LaTeX-packages ! babel
40811 If the newer package
40816 \begin_inset Index idx
40819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40820 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
40825 is more appropriate (is the case when using XeTeX and/or non-TeX fonts),
40826 this package will be used instead of
40833 \begin_layout Description
40835 \begin_inset space ~
40846 would be more appropriate.
40849 \begin_layout Description
40850 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40851 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40855 (for German texts), type in
40858 \begin_inset Newline newline
40863 usepackage{ngerman}
40866 \begin_layout Description
40867 None will not use a language package.
40868 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40871 \begin_layout Standard
40872 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40875 \begin_layout Description
40877 \begin_inset space ~
40881 \begin_inset space ~
40885 \begin_inset space ~
40892 , but the LaTeX-package
40897 \begin_inset Index idx
40900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40901 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
40907 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40908 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40909 languages in TeX code.
40912 \begin_layout Description
40913 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40914 LyX converts all other characters into LaTeX commands, which may result
40915 in a big file when lots of LaTeX-commands are needed.
40918 \begin_layout Description
40920 \begin_inset space ~
40924 \begin_inset space ~
40927 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40930 \begin_layout Description
40932 \begin_inset space ~
40936 \begin_inset space ~
40939 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40942 \begin_layout Description
40944 \begin_inset space ~
40947 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40950 \begin_layout Description
40952 \begin_inset space ~
40956 \begin_inset space ~
40959 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40960 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40963 \begin_layout Description
40965 \begin_inset space ~
40969 \begin_inset space ~
40972 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40976 \begin_layout Description
40978 \begin_inset space ~
40982 \begin_inset space ~
40985 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
40986 ISO-8859-13 encoding
40989 \begin_layout Description
40991 \begin_inset space ~
40995 \begin_inset space ~
40999 \begin_inset space ~
41002 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
41003 \begin_inset space ~
41009 \begin_layout Description
41011 \begin_inset space ~
41015 \begin_inset space ~
41019 \begin_inset space ~
41022 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
41023 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
41026 \begin_layout Description
41028 \begin_inset space ~
41032 \begin_inset space ~
41035 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
41036 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
41037 is not available for LaTeX you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41038 \begin_inset space ~
41042 \begin_inset space ~
41048 \begin_layout Description
41050 \begin_inset space ~
41054 \begin_inset space ~
41057 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41058 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41059 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for LaTeX
41060 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41061 \begin_inset space ~
41065 \begin_inset space ~
41071 \begin_layout Description
41073 \begin_inset space ~
41077 \begin_inset space ~
41080 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41083 \begin_layout Description
41085 \begin_inset space ~
41089 \begin_inset space ~
41092 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41095 \begin_layout Description
41097 \begin_inset space ~
41101 \begin_inset space ~
41104 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41107 \begin_layout Description
41109 \begin_inset space ~
41112 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41115 \begin_layout Description
41117 \begin_inset space ~
41120 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41123 \begin_layout Description
41125 \begin_inset space ~
41129 \begin_inset space ~
41132 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41135 \begin_layout Description
41137 \begin_inset space ~
41141 \begin_inset space ~
41147 \begin_layout Description
41149 \begin_inset space ~
41153 \begin_inset space ~
41156 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41159 \begin_layout Description
41161 \begin_inset space ~
41165 \begin_inset space ~
41171 \begin_layout Description
41173 \begin_inset space ~
41177 \begin_inset space ~
41180 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41185 \begin_inset Index idx
41188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41189 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
41194 , when using this, set the document language to
41199 \begin_layout Description
41201 \begin_inset space ~
41205 \begin_inset space ~
41208 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41212 , when using this, set the document language to
41215 \begin_inset space ~
41221 \begin_layout Description
41223 \begin_inset space ~
41227 \begin_inset space ~
41230 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41235 \begin_inset Index idx
41238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41239 LaTeX-packages ! japanese
41244 , when using this, set the document language to
41249 \begin_layout Description
41251 \begin_inset space ~
41255 \begin_inset space ~
41258 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41262 , when using this, set the document language to
41267 \begin_layout Description
41269 \begin_inset space ~
41273 \begin_inset space ~
41276 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41280 , when using this, set the document language to
41285 \begin_layout Description
41287 \begin_inset space ~
41290 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41293 \begin_layout Description
41295 \begin_inset space ~
41299 \begin_inset space ~
41303 \begin_inset space ~
41306 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41309 \begin_layout Description
41311 \begin_inset space ~
41315 \begin_inset space ~
41319 \begin_inset space ~
41322 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41323 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41324 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41327 \begin_layout Description
41329 \begin_inset space ~
41333 \begin_inset space ~
41339 \begin_layout Description
41341 \begin_inset space ~
41345 \begin_inset space ~
41348 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41349 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41352 \begin_layout Description
41354 \begin_inset space ~
41358 \begin_inset space ~
41361 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the LaTeX-package
41366 \begin_inset Index idx
41369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41370 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
41375 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41378 \begin_layout Description
41380 \begin_inset space ~
41384 \begin_inset space ~
41387 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41395 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the LaTeX-package
41400 LyX automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview XeTeX
41402 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41405 \begin_layout Description
41407 \begin_inset space ~
41411 \begin_inset space ~
41414 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
41419 \begin_inset Index idx
41422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41423 LaTeX-packages ! ucs
41428 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41431 \begin_layout Description
41433 \begin_inset space ~
41436 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
41441 \begin_inset Index idx
41444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41445 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
41451 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41455 \begin_layout Description
41457 \begin_inset space ~
41461 \begin_inset space ~
41465 \begin_inset space ~
41468 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41469 \begin_inset space ~
41475 \begin_layout Description
41477 \begin_inset space ~
41481 \begin_inset space ~
41485 \begin_inset space ~
41488 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41489 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41490 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41494 \begin_layout Description
41496 \begin_inset space ~
41500 \begin_inset space ~
41504 \begin_inset space ~
41507 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41508 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41511 \begin_layout Section
41513 \begin_inset Index idx
41516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41523 \begin_inset Index idx
41526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41533 \begin_inset Index idx
41536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41537 Color ! Shaded boxes
41543 \begin_inset Index idx
41546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41547 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41555 \begin_layout Standard
41556 Here you can alter the font color for the
41560 (default: black), for
41563 \begin_inset space ~
41568 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41572 (default: white) and for
41575 \begin_inset space ~
41585 sets the color back to the default.
41588 \begin_layout Standard
41589 Clicking any button showing
41597 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41598 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41599 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41600 later more quickly.
41603 \begin_layout Standard
41604 Note, if you change the
41607 \begin_inset space ~
41612 font color and use the option
41615 \begin_inset space ~
41620 in the document settings under
41623 \begin_inset space ~
41628 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41629 \begin_inset space ~
41633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41635 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41642 \begin_layout Standard
41643 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41649 \begin_layout Standard
41653 \begin_inset space ~
41662 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41664 \begin_inset space ~
41667 Code after a forced page break:
41670 \begin_layout Itemize
41671 For the page color:
41672 \begin_inset Newline newline
41679 pagecolor{color name}
41682 \begin_layout Itemize
41683 For the text color:
41684 \begin_inset Newline newline
41694 \begin_layout Standard
41695 You are restricted to one of
41731 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
41738 \begin_inset space ~
41744 \begin_inset Newline newline
41747 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41748 names to refer to them:
41751 \begin_layout Itemize
41757 \begin_inset Newline newline
41762 page_backgroundcolor
41765 \begin_layout Itemize
41769 \begin_inset space ~
41775 \begin_inset Newline newline
41783 \begin_layout Itemize
41787 \begin_inset space ~
41793 \begin_inset Newline newline
41801 \begin_layout Itemize
41805 \begin_inset space ~
41811 \begin_inset Newline newline
41819 \begin_layout Standard
41820 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
41823 \begin_inset space ~
41831 \begin_inset space ~
41839 \begin_layout Section
41843 \begin_layout Standard
41844 Here you can adjust the
41848 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41852 as described in section
41853 \begin_inset space ~
41857 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41859 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
41866 \begin_layout Section
41870 \begin_layout Standard
41871 Here you can specify if a citation style using the LaTeX packages
41876 \begin_inset Index idx
41879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41880 LaTeX-packages ! natbib
41890 \begin_inset Index idx
41893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41894 LaTeX-packages ! jurabib
41902 Sectioned bibliography
41904 using the LaTeX package
41909 \begin_inset Index idx
41912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41913 LaTeX-packages ! bibtopic
41918 and you can select a
41922 for the generation of the bibliography.
41923 For a further description see section
41924 \begin_inset space ~
41928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41930 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41937 \begin_layout Section
41941 \begin_layout Standard
41942 Here you can define the
41946 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41948 \begin_inset space ~
41952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41954 reference "sec:Index"
41961 \begin_layout Section
41965 \begin_layout Standard
41966 The PDF properties are explained in section
41967 \begin_inset space ~
41971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41973 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41980 \begin_layout Section
41984 \begin_layout Standard
41985 These options will force LyX to use the LaTeX-packages
41990 \begin_inset Index idx
41993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41994 LaTeX-packages ! amsmath
42004 \begin_inset Index idx
42007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42008 LaTeX-packages ! amssymb
42018 \begin_inset Index idx
42021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42022 LaTeX-packages ! cancel
42032 \begin_inset Index idx
42035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42036 LaTeX-packages ! esint
42046 \begin_inset Index idx
42049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42050 LaTeX-packages ! mathdots
42060 \begin_inset Index idx
42063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42064 LaTeX-packages ! mathtools
42074 \begin_inset Index idx
42077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42078 LaTeX-packages ! mhchem
42088 \begin_inset Index idx
42091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42092 LaTeX-packages ! stackrel
42102 \begin_inset Index idx
42105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42106 LaTeX-packages ! stmaryrd
42116 \begin_inset Index idx
42119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42120 LaTeX-packages ! undertilde
42125 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42128 \begin_layout Description
42129 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas,
42130 ensure that you have this enabled.
42133 \begin_layout Description
42134 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42135 letters, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas, ensure that you have
42139 \begin_layout Description
42140 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42143 \begin_inset space ~
42155 \begin_layout Description
42156 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42159 \begin_inset space ~
42171 \begin_layout Description
42172 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42183 \begin_layout Description
42184 mathtools is used for the math commands
42220 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42227 \begin_layout Description
42228 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42230 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42239 \begin_layout Description
42240 stackrel is used for the math command
42257 \begin_layout Description
42258 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42261 \begin_layout Description
42262 undertilde is used for the math command
42270 Accents for one Character
42279 \begin_layout Section
42283 \begin_layout Standard
42284 The float placement options are described in the section
42287 \begin_inset space ~
42295 \begin_inset space ~
42303 \begin_layout Section
42307 \begin_layout Standard
42308 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42310 Program Code Listings
42315 \begin_inset space ~
42323 \begin_layout Section
42327 \begin_layout Standard
42328 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42336 set to be used and set the
42341 The itemize environment is described in section
42342 \begin_inset space ~
42346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42348 reference "sec:Itemize"
42355 \begin_layout Standard
42356 You can furthermore specify a
42359 \begin_inset space ~
42364 by inserting in this field the LaTeX command of the desired character.
42365 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42372 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42374 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42378 \begin_inset space \space{}
42382 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42392 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42393 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42396 \begin_layout Standard
42397 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42405 Some characters require to load special LaTeX-packages in the preamble
42408 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42409 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42411 \begin_inset space ~
42417 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42421 usepackage{textcomp}
42424 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42428 usepackage{amssymb}
42438 \begin_layout Section
42442 \begin_layout Standard
42443 Branches are described in section
42444 \begin_inset space ~
42448 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42450 reference "sec:Branches"
42457 \begin_layout Section
42459 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42461 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42468 \begin_layout Standard
42469 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42472 \begin_layout Description
42474 \begin_inset space ~
42478 \begin_inset space ~
42481 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42501 View Master Document
42502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42509 Update Master Document
42510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42517 menu or the toolbar.
42518 The default is set in
42520 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42521 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42523 \begin_inset space ~
42526 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42530 \begin_inset space ~
42534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42536 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42543 \begin_layout Description
42545 \begin_inset space ~
42549 \begin_inset space ~
42552 Output settings for the menu
42554 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42556 \begin_inset space ~
42562 For a detailed description see section
42564 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42569 \begin_inset space ~
42577 \begin_layout Description
42579 \begin_inset space ~
42583 \begin_inset space ~
42586 Options offers settings for the export format
42592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42605 \begin_inset space ~
42610 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42611 \begin_inset space ~
42614 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42618 \begin_inset space ~
42623 settings are described in detail in section
42625 Math Output in XHTML
42630 \begin_inset space ~
42639 \begin_inset space ~
42643 \begin_inset space ~
42648 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42651 \begin_layout Section
42656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42666 \begin_layout Standard
42667 In this text field you can enter commands to load special LaTeX-packages
42668 or to define LaTeX-commands.
42669 The preamble is a thing for LaTeX-experts.
42670 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42674 \begin_layout Standard
42675 An introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
42676 \begin_inset space ~
42680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42682 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
42689 \begin_layout Chapter
42695 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42697 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42702 \begin_inset Index idx
42705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42714 \begin_layout Standard
42715 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42717 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42721 It has the following submenus.
42724 \begin_layout Section
42728 \begin_layout Subsection
42732 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42733 User Interface File
42734 \begin_inset Index idx
42737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42738 Customization ! of toolbars
42744 \begin_inset Index idx
42747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42748 Customization ! of menus
42756 \begin_layout Standard
42757 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42758 interface (ui) file.
42759 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42767 \begin_layout Description
42772 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42775 \begin_layout Description
42782 the menu entries in popup context menus
42785 \begin_layout Description
42790 specifies the toolbar buttons
42793 \begin_layout Standard
42794 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42795 and edit the entries.
42798 \begin_layout Standard
42799 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42811 entries must be finished with an explicit
42836 and in the case of the
42837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42849 The syntax for the entries is:
42852 \begin_layout Standard
42853 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42881 \begin_layout Standard
42883 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42886 All the LyX-functions are listed in the menu
42888 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42901 \begin_inset space ~
42909 \begin_layout Standard
42910 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42916 \begin_layout Standard
42917 For example, assuming you use the menu
42919 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42922 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42926 \begin_layout Standard
42927 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42951 \begin_layout Standard
42953 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42968 to have the sixth bookmark.
42971 \begin_layout Standard
42975 \begin_inset space ~
42980 allows you to change the appearance of LyX's toolbar buttons.
42981 The currently available icon sets are compared in
42982 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42985 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
42992 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42996 \begin_layout Standard
42999 Enable tool tips in main work area
43001 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
43005 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43009 \begin_layout Standard
43014 is the number of last opened files that LyX should display in the menu
43017 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43019 \begin_inset space ~
43027 \begin_layout Subsection
43031 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43035 \begin_layout Standard
43038 Restore window layouts and geometries
43040 LyX's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used
43041 in the last LyX session.
43044 \begin_layout Standard
43047 Restore cursor positions
43049 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
43053 \begin_layout Standard
43056 Load opened files from last session
43058 opens all files that were opened in the last LyX session.
43061 \begin_layout Standard
43064 Clear all session information
43066 deletes all information from previous LyX sessions (cursor positions, names
43067 of last opened documents, etc.).
43070 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43072 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43074 name "sub:Backup documents"
43079 \begin_inset Index idx
43082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43091 \begin_layout Standard
43094 Backup original documents when saving
43096 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43097 it was saved the last time.
43098 It is stored in the
43101 \begin_inset space ~
43107 \begin_inset space ~
43111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43113 reference "sec:Paths"
43117 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43120 \begin_inset space ~
43126 The backup file has the file extension
43127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43135 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43141 \begin_layout Standard
43144 Backup documents, every
43146 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43149 \begin_layout Standard
43152 Save documents compressed by default
43154 always saves files in a compressed format.
43157 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43158 Windows & work area
43161 \begin_layout Standard
43164 Open documents in tabs
43166 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of LyX.
43169 \begin_layout Standard
43174 is only active if a LyXServer pipe
43178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43180 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43186 reference "sec:Paths"
43190 for information about LyXServer pipes.
43196 If it is checked, LyX documents will be opened in the same running instance
43198 Otherwise a new LyX instance is created for each file.
43201 \begin_layout Standard
43204 Single close-tab button
43206 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43209 \begin_inset Graphics
43210 filename ../images/closetab.png
43217 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43218 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43221 \begin_layout Standard
43222 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43230 For this option you have to restart LyX before the change takes effect.
43238 \begin_layout Standard
43243 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43245 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43247 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43251 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43252 instances of LyX and only want to close the view in once instance.
43255 \begin_layout Subsection
43257 \begin_inset Index idx
43260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43267 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43269 name "sub:Screen-Fonts"
43276 \begin_layout Standard
43277 These fonts are used to display your documents within LyX.
43280 \begin_layout Standard
43281 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43289 This section only deals with the fonts
43294 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43297 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43298 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43309 \begin_layout Standard
43310 By default, LyX uses
43326 (depends on the system) as its
43329 \begin_inset space ~
43345 \begin_layout Standard
43346 You can change the font size with the
43353 \begin_layout Standard
43358 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43360 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43363 points have the size of 1
43364 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43368 \begin_inset space ~
43372 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43374 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43379 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43380 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43384 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43385 \begin_inset space ~
43389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43391 reference "sub:Document-Font"
43398 \begin_layout Standard
43401 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43403 enabled, LyX needs to redraw the screen less often.
43404 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43405 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43406 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43408 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43409 \begin_inset space ~
43415 \begin_layout Subsection
43417 \begin_inset Index idx
43420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43427 \begin_inset Index idx
43430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43439 \begin_layout Standard
43440 Here you can change the screen colors used by LyX by choosing an item in
43441 the list and selecting the
43448 \begin_layout Standard
43449 By checking the option
43453 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43456 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43457 \begin_inset space ~
43461 \begin_inset space ~
43466 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43469 \begin_layout Subsection
43471 \begin_inset Index idx
43474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43483 \begin_layout Standard
43484 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside LyX.
43487 \begin_layout Standard
43492 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43493 This feature is described in section
43494 \begin_inset space ~
43498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43500 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43507 \begin_layout Standard
43508 Checking the option
43511 \begin_inset space ~
43515 \begin_inset space ~
43519 \begin_inset space ~
43524 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43527 \begin_layout Section
43529 \begin_inset Index idx
43532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43541 \begin_layout Subsection
43545 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43549 \begin_layout Standard
43552 Cursor follows scrollbar
43554 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43558 \begin_layout Standard
43559 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43560 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43561 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43564 \begin_layout Standard
43567 Scroll below end of document
43569 is self-explanatory.
43572 \begin_layout Standard
43573 In LyX one can jump from word to word by pressing
43580 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43582 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43583 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43586 \begin_layout Standard
43589 Sort environments alphabetically
43591 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43594 \begin_layout Standard
43597 Group environments by their category
43599 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43602 \begin_layout Standard
43607 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43618 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43622 \begin_layout Standard
43623 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43628 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43629 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43633 \begin_layout Subsection
43635 \begin_inset Index idx
43638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43645 \begin_inset Index idx
43648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43649 Settings ! Shortcuts
43657 \begin_layout Standard
43662 specifies the file to be used to bind a LyX-function to a key.
43663 Several binding files are available, among them:
43666 \begin_layout Description
43667 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43670 \begin_layout Description
43671 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43683 \begin_layout Description
43684 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43687 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43695 \begin_layout Standard
43696 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43701 , and binding files for special languages.
43702 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43703 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43707 \begin_inset space \space{}
43711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43719 If you use LyX in a certain language, LyX will try to use the appropriate
43723 \begin_layout Standard
43724 Some binding files, like
43728 , only have a limited scope.
43729 When looking at the end of the file
43733 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43736 \begin_layout Standard
43740 \begin_inset space ~
43744 \begin_inset space ~
43749 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43750 in the selected key binding file.
43753 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43755 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43757 name "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
43762 \begin_inset Index idx
43765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43766 Key Bindings ! Editing
43774 \begin_layout Standard
43775 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43776 the table in the dialog that lists all LyX-functions and the bound shortcuts.
43777 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43780 Show key-bindings containing
43783 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43784 Insert there for example as keyword
43785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43792 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43793 functions that contain
43794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43802 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43803 All LyX-functions are also listed in the file
43807 that you will find in the
43814 \begin_layout Standard
43815 For example, to add the shortcut
43823 , select the function and press the
43828 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43829 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43832 \begin_layout Standard
43833 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43834 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the LyX
43835 Function definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the
43836 different function names as a semicolon separated list.
43837 LyX will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43842 \begin_layout Standard
43843 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43846 \begin_layout Standard
43847 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43849 The syntax of the entries is:
43852 \begin_layout Standard
43858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43876 \begin_layout Subsection
43878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43880 name "sub:Keyboard-Map"
43885 \begin_inset Index idx
43888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43895 \begin_inset Index idx
43898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43899 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43907 \begin_layout Standard
43908 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43909 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, LyX provides keyboard maps.
43910 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43911 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43914 \begin_inset space ~
43918 \begin_inset space ~
43923 and select the keyboard map file named
43930 \begin_layout Standard
43939 keyboard map and, if you use the
43943 bindings, you can select the first and second with
43946 arg "keymap-primary"
43952 arg "keymap-secondary"
43955 respectively or toggle between them with
43958 arg "keymap-toggle"
43964 \begin_layout Standard
43965 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43973 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
43982 \begin_layout Standard
43983 You can also specify the mouse
43985 Wheel scrolling speed
43988 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
43992 \begin_layout Standard
44000 \begin_inset space ~
44004 \begin_inset space ~
44009 you can select a key for zooming.
44010 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
44013 \begin_layout Subsection
44017 \begin_layout Standard
44018 Input completion is described in section
44019 \begin_inset space ~
44023 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44025 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44032 \begin_layout Section
44034 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44041 \begin_inset Index idx
44044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44051 \begin_inset Index idx
44054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44063 \begin_layout Standard
44064 The paths to the various resources used by LyX are normally determined during
44066 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44069 \begin_layout Description
44071 \begin_inset space ~
44074 directory This is LyX's working directory.
44075 It is the default when you
44086 \begin_inset space ~
44094 \begin_layout Description
44096 \begin_inset space ~
44099 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44101 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44103 \begin_inset space ~
44107 \begin_inset space ~
44115 \begin_layout Description
44117 \begin_inset space ~
44120 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44126 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44130 \begin_inset Newline newline
44134 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44146 button does not exist when using LyX on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44154 \begin_layout Description
44156 \begin_inset space ~
44160 \begin_inset Index idx
44163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44169 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44170 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44171 \begin_inset space ~
44175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44177 reference "sub:Backup documents"
44185 will be used to save the backups.
44186 \begin_inset Newline newline
44189 Backup files have the ending
44190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44200 \begin_layout Description
44205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44213 \begin_inset space ~
44216 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44217 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to LyX.
44218 \begin_inset Newline newline
44225 You add a BibTeX-database
44230 You can edit this file with the program
44239 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for LyX in its preferences under
44242 \begin_inset space ~
44248 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44253 and click on the LyX-symbol.
44254 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44260 and LyX need to be running the same time.
44261 \begin_inset Newline newline
44264 The pipe is also used for the
44269 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44275 reference "sub:Backup documents"
44280 \begin_inset Newline newline
44283 To use the LyXServer-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44284 \begin_inset Newline newline
44300 \begin_layout Description
44302 \begin_inset space ~
44305 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44308 \begin_layout Description
44310 \begin_inset space ~
44313 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44314 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44315 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44318 \begin_layout Description
44320 \begin_inset space ~
44323 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44329 You only need to specify it if you are using
44333 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44339 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44343 \begin_layout Description
44345 \begin_inset space ~
44348 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44349 When LyX needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see
44350 where to find it on the system.
44351 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when LyX
44352 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44354 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44358 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44361 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44362 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44365 \begin_layout Description
44367 \begin_inset space ~
44370 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44371 which are included in a LyX document via commands in TeX code or in the
44373 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44375 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44376 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44377 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44378 scanned for the input files.
44379 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44380 to be relative to the directory of your LyX file.
44381 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44382 compilation may fail for some documents.
44385 \begin_layout Section
44389 \begin_layout Standard
44390 Here you can insert your
44399 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44401 \begin_inset space ~
44405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44407 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44411 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44414 \begin_layout Section
44416 \begin_inset Index idx
44419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44420 Language ! Settings
44426 \begin_inset Index idx
44429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44430 Settings ! Language
44438 \begin_layout Subsection
44440 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44442 name "sub:Prefs-Language"
44449 \begin_layout Description
44451 \begin_inset space ~
44455 \begin_inset space ~
44458 language Here you can select the language for LyX's menus.
44459 You can find its actual translation status here:
44460 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44462 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44469 \begin_layout Description
44471 \begin_inset space ~
44474 package determines which LaTeX package should be loaded to handle language
44476 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44477 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44494 The most widespread language package is
44499 \begin_inset Index idx
44502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44503 LaTeX-packages ! babel
44508 ; it is the default language package in classic LaTeX.
44509 More recent typesetting engines such as XeTeX and LuaTeX come with the
44510 alternative language package
44515 \begin_inset Index idx
44518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44519 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
44524 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44525 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44531 The available selections are described in section
44532 \begin_inset space ~
44536 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44538 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44545 \begin_layout Description
44547 \begin_inset space ~
44550 start If a special LaTeX-package is needed to write in a certain document
44551 language, you can here specify the command to start the package.
44552 An example is the start command
44558 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44563 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44578 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44583 \begin_layout Description
44585 \begin_inset space ~
44593 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44594 command toggles the package on and off.
44597 \begin_layout Description
44599 \begin_inset space ~
44603 \begin_inset space ~
44606 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44610 \begin_layout Description
44612 \begin_inset space ~
44616 \begin_inset space ~
44619 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in LyX's dialogs.
44622 \begin_layout Description
44624 \begin_inset space ~
44628 \begin_inset space ~
44631 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44632 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44633 used by all LaTeX-packages.
44634 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44641 \begin_layout Description
44643 \begin_inset space ~
44646 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44648 When this option is not set, the
44651 \begin_inset space ~
44656 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the LaTeX-output.
44657 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44660 \begin_inset space ~
44668 \begin_layout Description
44670 \begin_inset space ~
44676 \begin_inset space ~
44682 When it is not set, the
44685 \begin_inset space ~
44690 is set to the end of the document.
44693 \begin_layout Description
44695 \begin_inset space ~
44699 \begin_inset space ~
44702 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44703 language will be underlined in blue.
44706 \begin_layout Description
44708 \begin_inset space ~
44712 \begin_inset space ~
44715 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44716 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44719 \begin_layout Description
44721 \begin_inset space ~
44724 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44725 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44726 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44727 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44730 \begin_layout Subsection
44734 \begin_layout Standard
44735 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44736 \begin_inset space ~
44740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44742 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44749 \begin_layout Section
44753 \begin_layout Subsection
44757 \begin_layout Description
44759 \begin_inset space ~
44763 \begin_inset space ~
44766 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44769 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44770 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44772 \begin_inset space ~
44778 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44781 \begin_layout Description
44783 \begin_inset space ~
44787 \begin_inset Index idx
44790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44797 \begin_inset Index idx
44800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44801 Settings ! Date format
44806 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44807 \begin_inset Newline newline
44811 \begin_inset Flex URL
44814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44816 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
44822 \begin_inset Newline newline
44825 For example the format
44826 \begin_inset Newline newline
44830 \begin_inset Newline newline
44833 prints the date as day/month/year.
44836 \begin_layout Description
44838 \begin_inset space ~
44842 \begin_inset space ~
44845 export Setting what LyX is allowed to overwrite on export.
44848 \begin_layout Description
44850 \begin_inset space ~
44853 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44855 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44857 \begin_inset space ~
44863 For a detailed description see section
44865 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44870 \begin_inset space ~
44878 \begin_layout Subsection
44880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44887 \begin_inset Index idx
44890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44897 \begin_inset Index idx
44900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44909 \begin_layout Description
44911 \begin_inset space ~
44914 printer Here you can specify the name of your
44919 The name will be used when the
44924 \begin_inset Newline newline
44928 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44936 You can leave this field empty on Windows systems because it has no effect.
44944 \begin_layout Description
44946 \begin_inset space ~
44949 command is the command LyX
44950 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44954 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44957 LaTeX uses for printing.
44965 \begin_layout Description
44967 \begin_inset space ~
44971 \begin_inset space ~
44974 Options Here you can specify printer options.
44975 A list of printer options with explanations can be found in the documentation
44976 of the program that provides the
44983 \begin_layout Description
44985 \begin_inset space ~
44989 \begin_inset space ~
44993 \begin_inset space ~
44996 printer This option works only for the
45001 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45009 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45013 It activates a configuration file for dvips.
45014 This is an option only for dvips experts.
45017 \begin_layout Subsection
45022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45030 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45032 name "sub:LaTeX-settings"
45037 \begin_inset Index idx
45040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45049 \begin_layout Description
45051 \begin_inset space ~
45058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45066 \begin_inset space ~
45070 \begin_inset space ~
45073 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
45078 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
45099 are used for Cyrillic.
45100 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
45101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45113 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
45114 LyX sets up in the background.
45115 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
45118 \begin_layout Description
45120 \begin_inset space ~
45124 \begin_inset space ~
45127 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
45132 value depends on your LaTeX-system setup.
45135 \begin_layout Description
45137 \begin_inset space ~
45141 \begin_inset space ~
45145 \begin_inset space ~
45149 \begin_inset space ~
45152 options They only have an effect when the program
45156 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45159 \begin_layout Standard
45160 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45161 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45162 manuals of the applications.
45165 \begin_layout Description
45167 \begin_inset space ~
45170 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45171 \begin_inset space ~
45175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45177 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
45184 \begin_layout Description
45186 \begin_inset space ~
45189 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45190 \begin_inset space ~
45194 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45196 reference "sub:Index-Program"
45203 \begin_layout Description
45205 \begin_inset space ~
45208 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45209 \begin_inset space ~
45213 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45215 reference "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
45222 \begin_layout Description
45227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45235 \begin_inset space ~
45238 command Command for the program
45242 that is described in the section
45248 Additional Features
45253 \begin_layout Standard
45254 There are additionally the following options:
45257 \begin_layout Description
45259 \begin_inset space ~
45263 \begin_inset space ~
45267 \begin_inset space ~
45271 \begin_inset space ~
45275 \begin_inset space ~
45278 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45296 to separate folders.
45297 This option is enabled by default when you use LyX on Windows.
45298 \begin_inset Index idx
45301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45308 \begin_inset Index idx
45311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45320 \begin_layout Description
45322 \begin_inset space ~
45326 \begin_inset space ~
45330 \begin_inset space ~
45334 \begin_inset space ~
45338 \begin_inset space ~
45342 \begin_inset space ~
45345 changes Removes all manually set
45351 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
45352 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
45354 \begin_inset space ~
45359 dialog when changing the document class.
45362 \begin_layout Section
45364 \begin_inset space ~
45368 \begin_inset Index idx
45371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45380 \begin_layout Subsection
45382 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45384 name "sub:Converters"
45389 \begin_inset Index idx
45392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45401 \begin_layout Standard
45402 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45403 from one format to another.
45404 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45405 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45412 \begin_inset space ~
45417 field and press the
45422 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45426 \begin_inset space ~
45431 drop-down list, modify the
45435 field and press the
45442 \begin_layout Standard
45445 Converter File Cache
45451 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45453 Maximum Age (in days
45456 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45457 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45460 \begin_layout Standard
45461 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45462 definition, is described in the section
45473 \begin_layout Subsection
45475 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45477 name "sec:File-Formats"
45482 \begin_inset Index idx
45485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45492 \begin_inset Index idx
45495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45504 \begin_layout Standard
45505 Here you find the list of defined file formats that LyX can handle.
45514 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45517 \begin_layout Standard
45518 You can also define the
45520 Default output format
45522 that is used when you use
45524 View, Update, View Master Document
45528 Update Master Document
45534 menu or the toolbar.
45537 \begin_layout Standard
45538 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45549 \begin_layout Standard
45550 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in LyX's temporary
45551 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45552 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45553 This is done by specifying a
45558 More about this is described in the section
45569 \begin_layout Chapter
45570 Units available in LyX
45571 \begin_inset Index idx
45574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45581 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45583 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45590 \begin_layout Standard
45592 \begin_inset space ~
45596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45598 reference "tab:Units"
45602 explains all the units available in LyX and used in this documentation.
45605 \begin_layout Standard
45606 \begin_inset Float table
45612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45613 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45616 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45631 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45639 \begin_inset Tabular
45640 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
45641 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
45642 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45643 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45739 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45743 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45767 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45771 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45794 scaled point (65536
45795 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45799 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45823 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45827 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45851 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45855 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45859 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45883 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45887 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45910 % of original image width
45917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46099 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46103 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46124 \begin_layout Chapter
46126 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46128 name "chap:Credits"
46135 \begin_layout Standard
46136 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46137 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46140 \begin_layout Itemize
46143 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46146 \begin_layout Itemize
46152 \begin_layout Itemize
46158 \begin_layout Itemize
46164 \begin_layout Itemize
46170 \begin_layout Itemize
46176 \begin_layout Itemize
46182 \begin_layout Itemize
46188 \begin_layout Itemize
46191 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46194 \begin_layout Itemize
46200 \begin_layout Itemize
46206 \begin_layout Itemize
46212 \begin_layout Itemize
46218 \begin_layout Itemize
46224 \begin_layout Itemize
46230 \begin_layout Itemize
46236 \begin_layout Itemize
46242 \begin_layout Itemize
46244 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46253 \begin_layout Standard
46254 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46257 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46264 \begin_layout Bibliography
46265 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46266 LatexCommand bibitem
46273 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46276 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46281 \begin_inset Newline newline
46285 \begin_inset Flex URL
46288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46290 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46298 \begin_layout Bibliography
46299 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46300 LatexCommand bibitem
46301 key "latexcompanion"
46305 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46307 The LaTeX Companion Second Edition.
46310 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46313 \begin_layout Bibliography
46314 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46315 LatexCommand bibitem
46320 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46323 A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition.
46326 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46329 \begin_layout Bibliography
46330 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46331 LatexCommand bibitem
46338 LaTeX: A Document Preparation System.
46341 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46344 \begin_layout Bibliography
46345 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46346 LatexCommand bibitem
46358 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46361 \begin_layout Bibliography
46362 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46363 LatexCommand bibitem
46369 \begin_inset Newline newline
46373 \begin_inset Flex URL
46376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46378 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46386 \begin_layout Bibliography
46387 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46388 LatexCommand bibitem
46394 \begin_inset Newline newline
46398 \begin_inset Flex URL
46401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46403 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
46411 \begin_layout Bibliography
46412 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46413 LatexCommand bibitem
46419 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46421 name "Documentation"
46422 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46431 \begin_inset Newline newline
46435 \begin_inset Flex URL
46438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46440 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46448 \begin_layout Bibliography
46449 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46450 LatexCommand bibitem
46456 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46458 name "Documentation"
46459 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46463 how to use the program
46468 \begin_inset Newline newline
46472 \begin_inset Flex URL
46475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46477 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46485 \begin_layout Bibliography
46486 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46487 LatexCommand bibitem
46493 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46495 name "Documentation"
46496 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46505 \begin_inset Newline newline
46509 \begin_inset Flex URL
46512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46514 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46522 \begin_layout Bibliography
46523 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46524 LatexCommand bibitem
46530 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46532 name "Documentation"
46533 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
46542 \begin_inset Newline newline
46546 \begin_inset Flex URL
46549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46551 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
46559 \begin_layout Bibliography
46560 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46561 LatexCommand bibitem
46567 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46569 name "Documentation"
46570 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
46574 of the AMS LaTeX-packages:
46575 \begin_inset Newline newline
46579 \begin_inset Flex URL
46582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46584 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
46592 \begin_layout Bibliography
46593 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46594 LatexCommand bibitem
46600 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46602 name "Documentation"
46603 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
46607 of the LaTeX-package
46612 \begin_inset Index idx
46615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46616 LaTeX-packages ! caption
46622 \begin_inset Newline newline
46626 \begin_inset Flex URL
46629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46631 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
46639 \begin_layout Bibliography
46640 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46641 LatexCommand bibitem
46647 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46649 name "Documentation"
46650 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
46654 of the LaTeX-package
46659 \begin_inset Index idx
46662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46663 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
46669 \begin_inset Newline newline
46673 \begin_inset Flex URL
46676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46678 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
46686 \begin_layout Bibliography
46687 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46688 LatexCommand bibitem
46694 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46696 name "Documentation"
46697 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
46701 of the LaTeX-package
46706 \begin_inset Index idx
46709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46710 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
46716 \begin_inset Newline newline
46720 \begin_inset Flex URL
46723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46725 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46733 \begin_layout Bibliography
46734 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46735 LatexCommand bibitem
46741 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46743 name "Documentation"
46744 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46748 of the LaTeX-package
46753 \begin_inset Index idx
46756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46757 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
46763 \begin_inset Newline newline
46767 \begin_inset Flex URL
46770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46772 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
46780 \begin_layout Bibliography
46781 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46782 LatexCommand bibitem
46788 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46790 name "Documentation"
46791 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
46795 of the LaTeX-package
46800 \begin_inset Index idx
46803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46804 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
46810 \begin_inset Newline newline
46814 \begin_inset Flex URL
46817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46819 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
46827 \begin_layout Bibliography
46828 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46829 LatexCommand bibitem
46835 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46837 name "Documentation"
46838 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
46842 of the LaTeX-package
46847 \begin_inset Index idx
46850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46851 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
46857 \begin_inset Newline newline
46861 \begin_inset Flex URL
46864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46866 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
46874 \begin_layout Bibliography
46875 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46876 LatexCommand bibitem
46882 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46884 name "Documentation"
46885 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
46889 of the LaTeX-package
46894 \begin_inset Index idx
46897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46898 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
46904 \begin_inset Newline newline
46908 \begin_inset Flex URL
46911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46913 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
46921 \begin_layout Bibliography
46922 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46923 LatexCommand bibitem
46929 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46932 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
46936 how to set up LyX for Arabic:
46937 \begin_inset Newline newline
46941 \begin_inset Flex URL
46944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46946 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
46954 \begin_layout Bibliography
46955 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46956 LatexCommand bibitem
46962 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46965 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
46969 how to set up LyX for Armenian:
46970 \begin_inset Newline newline
46974 \begin_inset Flex URL
46977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46979 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
46987 \begin_layout Bibliography
46988 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46989 LatexCommand bibitem
46995 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46998 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
47002 how to set up LyX for Cyrillic languages:
47003 \begin_inset Newline newline
47007 \begin_inset Flex URL
47010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47012 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47020 \begin_layout Bibliography
47021 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47022 LatexCommand bibitem
47028 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47031 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47035 how to set up LyX for Farsi:
47036 \begin_inset Newline newline
47040 \begin_inset Flex URL
47043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47045 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47053 \begin_layout Bibliography
47054 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47055 LatexCommand bibitem
47061 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47064 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47068 how to set up LyX for Hebrew:
47069 \begin_inset Newline newline
47073 \begin_inset Flex URL
47076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47078 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47086 \begin_layout Bibliography
47087 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47088 LatexCommand bibitem
47094 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47097 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47101 how to set up LyX for Japanese:
47102 \begin_inset Newline newline
47106 \begin_inset Flex URL
47109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47111 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47119 \begin_layout Bibliography
47120 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47121 LatexCommand bibitem
47127 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47130 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47134 how to set up LyX for Latvian:
47135 \begin_inset Newline newline
47139 \begin_inset Flex URL
47142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47144 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47152 \begin_layout Bibliography
47153 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47154 LatexCommand bibitem
47160 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47163 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47167 how to set up LyX for Lithuanian:
47168 \begin_inset Newline newline
47172 \begin_inset Flex URL
47175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47177 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47185 \begin_layout Bibliography
47186 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47187 LatexCommand bibitem
47193 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47196 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47200 how to set up LyX for Mongolian:
47201 \begin_inset Newline newline
47205 \begin_inset Flex URL
47208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47210 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47218 \begin_layout Bibliography
47219 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47220 LatexCommand bibitem
47226 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47229 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47233 how to set up LyX for Vietnamese:
47234 \begin_inset Newline newline
47238 \begin_inset Flex URL
47241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47243 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47251 \begin_layout Bibliography
47252 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47253 LatexCommand bibitem
47259 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47262 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47266 about new features in
47271 \begin_inset Newline newline
47275 \begin_inset Flex URL
47278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47280 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47288 \begin_layout Standard
47289 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47323 \begin_inset Note Note
47326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47333 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47334 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47335 bibliography is the second one:
47343 \begin_layout Standard
47344 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47345 LatexCommand bibtex
47346 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47347 options "biblio/alphadin"
47354 \begin_layout Standard
47355 The above bibliography is created from a BibTeX-database.
47358 \begin_layout Standard
47359 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47360 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47366 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47367 LatexCommand printindex